Imagine Communications Platinum IP3 Platinum IP3 Frame and Modules Installation and Operation Manual
Διαφήμιση
Διαφήμιση
Installation and Operation Manual
Platinum™ IP3
Frame and Modules
February 2015
Edition D
Platinum™ IP3 Frame and Modules Installation and Operation Manual
Publication Information
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp.
Proprietary and Confidential.
Imagine Communications considers this document and its contents to be proprietary and confidential.
Except for making a reasonable number of copies for your own internal use, you may not reproduce this publication, or any part thereof, in any form, by any method, for any purpose, or in any language other than English without the written consent of Imagine Communications. All others uses are illegal.
This publication is designed to assist in the use of the product as it exists on the date of publication of this manual, and may not reflect the product at the current time or an unknown time in the future. This publication does not in any way warrant description accuracy or guarantee the use for the product to which it refers. Imagine Communications reserves the right, without notice to make such changes in equipment, design, specifications, components, or documentation as progress may warrant to improve the performance of the product.
Trademarks
Platinum™, Platinum™ IP3, Magellan™, Magellan CCS Navigator™ are trademarks or trade names of
Imagine Communications or its subsidiaries.
Microsoft® and Windows® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. All other trademarks and trade names are the property of their respective companies.
Contact Information
Imagine Communications has office locations around the world. For domestic and international location and contact information, visit our Contact page
(http://www.imaginecommunications.com/company/contact-us.aspx).
Support Contact Information
For domestic and international support contact information see:
Support Contacts (http://www.imaginecommunications.com/services/customer-care.aspx)
eCustomer Portal (http://support.imaginecommunications.com)
Academy Training (http://www.imaginecommunicationsacademy.com)
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 2
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Contents
Contents
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 3
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Contents
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 4
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Contents
Video Crosspoint Module (PX-576x1024-3G) ....................................................... 61
Audio TDM Crosspoint Module (PX-ATDM64-X28) .............................................. 69
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 5
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Contents
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 6
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Contents
Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer/Demultiplexer Modules........................... 110
PT-FSDMX-IBG/PT-FSDMXO-IBG Frame Synchronizer and Demultiplexing Input Modules ................ 111
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 7
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Contents
Multichannel Audio Digital Interface (MADI) Modules ...................................... 166
Analog/Digital Audio Converter Modules with TDM .......................................... 189
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 8
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Contents
AES Balanced/Coaxial Modules with TDM Capability ......................................... 209
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 9
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Contents
1500 Watt Power Supply and External Power Supply Frame ............................. 246
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 10
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Contents
PX-FRONT-FAN and PX-REAR-FAN Modules ....................................................... 266
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 11
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Contents
Power Adapter Module (PX-PWR-ADPTR) .......................................................... 290
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 12
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Preface
Manual Information
Purpose
This manual details the features, installation, operation, maintenance, and specifications for the
Platinum IP3.
Audience
This manual is written for engineers, technicians, and operators responsible for installation, setup, maintenance, and/or operation of the Platinum IP3.
Revision History
B
C
Edition
Date
A
Comments
December 2012 Preliminary Version
January 2013 First Release
October 2014 Third Release
D February 2015 Fourth Release
Support for PX-RES in Platinum 5 RU and 9 RU
Frames.
See PX-RES in a Platinum frame (on page 36 )
Writing Conventions
This manual adheres to the following writing conventions.
Table 1: Writing Conventions
Term or Convention
Bold
Italics
Description
Indicates dialog box, property sheet, field, button, check box, list box, combo box, menu, submenu, window, list, and selection names
Indicates email addresses, names of books and publications, and first instances of new terms and specialized words that need emphasis
Preface
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 13
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Term or Convention Description
CAPS
Code
> hyperlink
Internet address
Indicates a specific key on the keyboard, such as ENTER,
TAB, CTRL, ALT, DELETE
Indicates variables or command-line entries, such as a DOS entry or something you type into a field.
Indicates the direction of navigation through a hierarchy of menus and windows.
Indicates a jump to another location within the electronic document or elsewhere
Indicates a jump to a Web site or URL
Note:
Indicates important information that helps to avoid and troubleshoot problems
Preface
Obtaining Documents
Product support documents can be viewed or downloaded from our website. Alternatively, contact your
Customer Service representative to request a document.
Unpacking/Shipping Information
Unpacking a Product
This product was carefully inspected, tested, and calibrated before shipment to ensure years of stable and trouble-free service.
1. Check equipment for any visible damage that may have occurred during transit.
2. Confirm that you have received all items listed on the packing list.
3. Contact your dealer if any item on the packing list is missing.
4. Contact the carrier if any item is damaged.
5. Remove all packaging material from the product and its associated components before you install the unit.
Keep at least one set of original packaging, in the event that you need to return a product for servicing.
Returning a Product
In the unlikely event that your product fails to operate properly, please contact Customer Service to obtain a Return Authorization (RA) number, and then send the unit back for servicing.
Keep at least one set of original packaging in the event that a product needs to be returned for service.
If the original package is not available, you can supply your own packaging as long as it meets the following criteria:
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 14
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
The packaging must be able to withstand the product’s weight.
The product must be held rigid within the packaging.
There must be at least 2 in. (5 cm) of space between the product and the container.
The corners of the product must be protected.
Preface
Ship products back to us for servicing prepaid and, if possible, in the original packaging material. If the product is still within the warranty period, we will return the product prepaid after servicing.
Safety
This manual contains safety precautions and recommendations specific to the IP3 controller product.
The IP3 controller is rack-mountable using rack rails provided with the unit, and it is strongly recommended to do so. See the specifications section for the electrical current load of the product, and connect the redundant power supplies to electrical circuits which are each capable of supplying the full load of the unit. The IP3 controller is forced-air cooled; to prevent marring during handling and transit there are clear plastic coatings which cover the metallic surfaces and obstruct some of the air ventilation holes. Be sure to remove all of these clear plastic coatings before putting the unit into service.
IMPORTANT! Only qualified personnel should perform service procedures.
Table 2: Safety Terms and Symbols in this Manual
WARNING
Statements identifying conditions or practices that may result in
personal injury or loss of life. High voltage is present.
CAUTION
Statements identifying conditions or practices that can result in
damage to the equipment or other property.
Standards
Refer to the IP3 Safety and Standards Manual for details.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 15
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Waste from Electrical and Electronic
Equipment (WEEE) Compliance
Preface
The European Union (EU) Directive 2002/96/EC on Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment
(WEEE) deals with the collection, treatment, recovery, and recycling of electrical and electronic waste products. The objective of the WEEE Directive is to assign the responsibility for the disposal of associated hazardous waste to either the producers or users of these products. As of August 13, 2005, the producers or users of these products were required to recycle electrical and electronic equipment at end of its useful life, and may not dispose of the equipment in landfills or by using other unapproved methods. (Some EU member states may have different deadlines.)
In accordance with this EU Directive, companies selling electric or electronic devices in the EU will affix labels indicating that such products must be properly recycled. (See our website for more information.)
Contact your local sales representative for information on returning these products for recycling.
Equipment that complies with the EU directive will be marked with a WEEE-compliant emblem.
Figure 1: WEEE Compliance Emblem
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 16
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Introduction
Introduction
Platinum IP3 Overview
The Platinum IP3™ Intelligent Signal Routing System provides unprecedented scalability and flexibility to designers of new broadcast facilities, OB production vehicles, and other television switching, monitoring, and transmission facilities worldwide.
The Platinum IP3 features enhanced crosspoint and switching architectures which allow scalability to extremely large systems, coupled with a new frame design for improved density and reliability in large system configurations.
Product Description
The Platinum IP3 routing switcher system extends both the matrix size and functionality of our routing switcher product line. Its flexible modular architecture accommodates standard definition, high definition, and 1080p digital video signals while keeping a versatile frame and control system. This combination allows high performance, multi-format video, audio and embedded audio routing within a single, flexible frame.
The Platinum IP3 routing switcher system provides matrix expandability beyond 8×8, to 576×1024 in a single frame. The 8×8 building block provides ideal growth and flexibility for mixed applications such as high definition and serial digital interface, and other integrated processing opportunities such as analog and/or digital conversion. With its ability to route signals ranging from 3.0 Mb/s to 2.97 Gb/s, the IP3 router offers a clear growth path from lower bit rate signals to high bandwidth, high definition format signals. This router will also handle both AES and polarity sensitive ASI/SSI signal formats.
The Platinum IP3Router is available in the following frame size:
28 RU(PX-FR-28) frame supporting matrices up to 576x1024
Features
Routing for Large Systems
576x1024 in a single 28RU frame
1152x1024 in two 28RU frames
576x2048 in two 28RU frames
1152x2048 in four 28RU frames
1152x3072 in six 28RU frames
Video Routing
HD-SDI digital multirate from 3.00 Mb/s to 2.97 Gb/s
Digital video signals including SMPTE 310, SDI, ASI, HD-SDI
Analog video via conversion to/from SDI on I/O modules
Audio Routing
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 17
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Introduction
Digital audio signals including balanced and unbalanced (coaxial) AES
Analog stereo audio via conversion to/from AES on I/O modules
MADI audio - Embedded audio with the use of Audio De-multiplexing and Multiplexing boards
Module I/O in groups of 8 or 9 inputs and 8 or 16 outputs
Route to/from digital and analog signals with no external processing
Front-loading, hot swappable modules
Redundancy (power supplies, resource modules, signal paths) throughout
Enhanced control and monitoring capabilities
Secure access rights with restrictions by level, source, and destination
CCSP, SNMP, and third-party protocol support
Platinum IP3 Frame (PX-FR-28)
The flagship frame in the Platinum IP3 system is a 28RU frame, featuring 576 wideband video inputs distributed across 64 modular input slots, and 1024 wideband video outputs distributed across 64 modular slots. This can expand to 1152x1024 in two 28RU frames, while providing 2N redundant
crosspoint (XPT) modules. See Video Matrix Expansion (on page 29).
The Platinum IP3 frame is similar to the 28RU Platinum frame with some modifications. Larger matrix sizes are achieved via new crosspoint (XPT) modules, a new backplane (MI), and new Input/Output (I/O) modules. A new resource module (PX-RES) provides greater processing capacity, and an upgraded version of the Platinum TDM crosspoint module allows for twice the original matrix capacity.
The PX-FR-28 frame uses common, front-loadable, and hot-swappable input and output modules. The
Platinum IP3 frame uses unique Video and Audio Crosspoint modules which are not compatible with
Platinum frames. The frame has a passive module interconnect (MI) signal distribution module interconnecting the routing system.
The frame is accessible from the front via sectioned, removable doors. Status LEDs can be viewed through these doors; these LEDs indicate power supply presence (and status), resource module usage, and link light indicators for Ethernet communications ports. Four 1500 watt power supplies are present.
Frames with conversion or advanced processing options may require additional power supplies; or additional power supplies may be added for redundancy.
Status LEDs on Power Supply units, Resource cards, and various I/O modules are visible when the door is open. Alarms on various modules are reported to the Platinum IP3 Controller to ease hardware management of the system.
The Platinum IP3 frame is designed to be compliant with NEBS certification requirements (for example, module retention doors, non-removable door option, locking power supplies, etc.). The frame is compatible with router control software products such as Magellan CCS Navigator and can also be controlled via a web based Controller.
Platinum IP3 Architecture
The Platinum IP3's flexible modular architecture accommodates standard definition, high definition, and
1080p digital video signals while keeping a versatile frame and control system. This combination allows high performance, multi-format video, audio, and embedded audio routing within a single, flexible
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 18
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Introduction frame. The IP3 can switch signals from 3 Mb/s to 3Gb. It can pass and reclock both standard SD
(including 143, 177, 270, 360, and 540 Mb/s), HD (1.485 Gb/s), and SDI 3G signals, supporting routing of both SD and HD signals in the same router.
The Platinum wideband video and TDM audio switching fabrics (which allow for non-blocking audio processing) have been retained, and a third fabric for IP routing has been added. This switch supports faster module upgrades, faster control communication, and a packetized data switching infrastructure to facilitate metadata and hybrid switching and internal streaming.
To support audio matrix expansion between two IP3 frames, the internal Audio Time Division
Multiplexed (TDM) buses are Time-division multiplexed onto a higher speed TDM bus operating at 3
Gbits/s each and carried over 16 DensiShield channels. This requires a minimum of two DensiShield cables – one for outputs distribution and a second for input distribution or four cables if redundancy is desired. With the Platinum IP3's Audio Expansion option, a two frame system is fully non-blocking, meaning that audio inputs (embedded or discrete) in frame one can be routed to any output in frame two.
Removing the Frame Door
Note: While you can just open the front door of the Frame, you may want to remove it completely when you need better access to Modules.
While pressing in the chrome locking pin, lift the door off the hinge and remove.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 19
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Figure 2: IP3 Frame and close up of locking pin
Introduction
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 20
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Frame Architecture
Platinum IP3 Front View
Introduction
Figure 3: IP3 Frame viewed from the front
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 21
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Platinum IP3 Rear View
Introduction
Figure 4: IP3 Frame Rear View
Note: Rear Filler plates (required to maintain proper airflow in the frame and for Electro-Magnetic compliance) are installed by Imagine Communications Manufacturing to block the empty I/O slots. 1 slot, 8 slot, and 16 slot plates are available. If a Rear Filler plate is removed to install a new module, the empty slots should be closed with a Filler plate.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 22
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Platinum IP3 Frame Architecture
Introduction
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 23
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Figure 5: Platinum IP3 Frame Architecture
Introduction
Platinum IP3 Physical Specifications
Table 3: Platinum IP3 Physical Specifications
IP3
PLATINUM
Architecture
28 RU
PX-FR-28
28 RU
PT-FR-28
15 RU
PT-FR-15
Dimensions
Width
Depth
17.5 in. (44.5 cm) 17.5 in. (44.5 cm) 17.5 in. (44.5 cm)
18.5 in.(46.7cm)
23.5 in. including rear fans
18.5 in.(46.7cm) 18.5 in.(46.7cm)
Height 49.0 in.(124.5 cm) 49.0 in.(124.5 cm) 26.25 in.(66.7 cm)
Weight fully loaded (approx) 172 kg 350 lb (159 kg) 210 lb (95 kg)
Matrix Size 576x1024 512x512
Matrix Module Capacity
256x256
Input Slots
Output Slots
Video Crosspoint Slots
Crosspoint Slots
Resource Slots
TDM Slots
Sync Slots
PSU Slots
Monitoring Slots
Alarm Slots
Streaming Slots
64
64
2
64
64
32
32
8
1
8 8 4 (2 redundant)
2 (1 redundant) 2 (1 redundant) 2 (1 redundant)
2 (1 redundant) 2 (1 redundant) 2 (1 redundant)
2 (1 redundant) 2 (1 redundant) 2 (1 redundant)
8
4
4
4
1
NA
1
1
1
1
Standard Equipment
Power Supply
Fan Module (Rear, Front)
Upgrade Options
Redundant Power Supply
4
2
Yes
4
2
Yes
2
1
Yes
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 24
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
IP3
Architecture
28 RU
PX-FR-28
Redundant Resource Module Yes
Redundant Sync Options
Redundant Crosspoint
Yes
Yes
PLATINUM
28 RU
PT-FR-28
Yes
Yes
Yes
15 RU
PT-FR-15
Yes
Yes
Yes
Introduction
Frame Specific Components
Frame modular components include the following items:
Table 4: Frame Specific Components
Module Description
PX-RES
PX-CBP
Resource Module
Provides control logic for an IP3 frame. See Resource Module (PX-RES) (on page
PX-ALARM
PX-PS
Communications Back Panel
Interfaces between communications connectors and resource modules. See
Communications Back Panel (PX-CBP)
Alarm Module
Monitors power supplies and fans; provides LEDs and relay alarm contacts for both and allows custom alarm configurations based on parameters within a frame
(for example, signal presence, etc.)
See Alarm Expansion Module (PX-ALARM) (on page 51)
Power Supply Module
Four Power Supplies supply the core components for each frame. Frames with conversion or advanced processing options may require additional power
supplies; or additional power supplies may be added for redundancy.
See 1500 Watt Power Supply and External Power Supply Frame (on page 246).
PX-PD-TOP
PX-PD-BOT
PX-TOP-FAN
Power Distribution Modules
Interfaces with Power Supplies and distributes power to an IP3 system.
See External Power Supply Frame (PX-FR-EXPS) (on page 251)
Fan Module (Top)
Fan module to cool video crosspoint at top of IP3 frame. See PX-FRONT-FAN and
PX-REAR-FAN Modules (on page 266).
PX-BOT-FAN Fan Module (Bottom)
Fan module to cool video crosspoint at bottom of IP3 frame. See PX-FRONT-FAN
and PX-REAR-FAN Modules (on page 266).
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 25
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Module Description
Introduction
PX-REAR-FAN Fan Module (Rear)
Rear fan module to cool modules in IP3 frame; 7 Rear fan modules are installed in the IP3 frame and provide front to rear cooling. See PX-FRONT-FAN and PX-REAR-
PX-BP-28 Module Interconnect (Backplane)
Provides central signal distribution module for the frame between input, output,
and crosspoint modules. See Module Interconnect (PX-BP-28) (on page 280)
PX-SYNC-MI
PX-AUX
Sync Module Interconnect
The Sync (and optional redundant sync) module are located above the Resource
Module. They are visible when the front panel door is opened.
See Sync Module Interconnect (PX-SYNC-MI) (on page 289)
Auxiliary board for providing power to Front Fan modules. See Auxiliary Module
PX-PWR-ADPTR Board used for connecting power from External Power Supply frame (PX-FR-EXPS) to boards within the IP3 frame. See Power Adapter Module (PX-PWR-ADPTR) (on
Modules in the Frame (by Function)
The Platinum IP3 is a 28 RU frame, divided into sections for Input, Output, Crosspoint, and Control modules. The following is a representation of the division:
Group
Input
Module Types
All Input Modules
See List of Supported Input and Output Modules (on page 32)
Output All Output Modules
See List of Supported Input and Output Modules (on page 32)
Crosspoint Video Crosspoint
See Video Crosspoint Module (PX-576x1024-3G) (on page 61)
Control
ATDM Crosspoint
See Audio TDM Crosspoint Module (PX-ATDM64-X28) (on page 69)
PT-SYNC
See Sync Module Interconnect (PX-SYNC-MI) (on page 289)
Front Fan Modules
See PX-FRONT-FAN and PX-REAR-FAN Modules (on page 266)
Data Switch
PX-ALARM-DATA
See Alarm Expansion Module (PX-ALARM) (on page 51)
Slots
64
64
2
2
2
2
1
1
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 26
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Group Module Types
PX-RES
See Resource Module (PX-RES) (on page 36)
Reserved (for future use)
Slots
2
2
Introduction
Frame Specifications
The specifications in this section are for the Platinum IP3 frame and system-wide components.
Specifications for individual modules are listed with their detailed descriptions. Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice.
Table 5: Power Supply Specifications
Item
Power
Specification
Maximum 1500W power supply
Output
Current sharing
V1 = +5 VDC @ 10A
V2 = +24 VDC @ 62A
FET Isolated
Hot Swappable
Performance temperature 41°F (5°C) to 104°F (40°C) at 100% power rating
Operating temperature 32° F (0°C) to 122°F (50°C) at 100% power rating
Efficiency = 80 Plus Gold (87% @ 20% and 100% load, 90% at 50% load)
Power Consumption
Power Consumption of Frame and Input/Output Modules
Table 6: Power Consumption
Module
PX-RES
24V Power Rail
15W
5V Power Rail
0W
PX-ALARM-ATDM
PX-ALARM-DATA
(No Expansion)
2W
0.35W
0.35W
0.35W
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential.
Total Power
15W
2.35W
0.7W
February 2015 | Page 27
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Module 24V Power Rail 5V Power Rail
6W 0.4W PX-ALARM-DATA
(Expansion)
PX-576x1024-3G
PX-ATDM64-X28
236W
55W
0.1W
0.8W
PX-FRONT-FAN-TOP 55.2W
PX-FRONT-FAN-BOT 55.2W
PX-REAR-FAN-ADPTR 0
PX-REAR-FAN 67W
0.82W
0.82W
0.15W
0
PX-HSR9C-IBG
PX-HSR9O-IBG
PX-HSR9C1D-IBG
PX-HSR9O1D-IBG
10.7W
14W
13W
16.3W
PX-HSR16C-OBG
PX-HSR16O-OBG
11.7W
21.9W
PX-HSR8O2DS-OBG 18W
PX-HSR8C2DS-OBG 14.1W
PT-FSDMX-IBG
PT-FSDMXO-IBG
50W
52W
PT-FSDX8C1D-IBG 52W
LEGACY PLATINUM MODULES
0.43W
0.43W
0.43W
0.43W
0.43W
0.43W
0.43W
0.43W
0.15W
0.15W
0.15W
Module
PT-MADI4C-IBG
PT-MADI4O-IBG
PT-MADI4C-OBG
PT-MADI4O-OBG
PT-ADCT-IB
PT-DACT-OB
PT-AECT-IB
PT-AEBT-IB
PT-AECT-OB
PT-AEBT-OB
PT-DEC-IB
PT-ENC-OB
Consumption
15W
18W
22W
25W
24.7W
14.7W
2.4W
6.5W
13W
10W
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential.
Total Power
6.4W
236.1W
55.8W
56.02W
56.02W
0.15W
67W
11.13W
14.43W
13.43W
16.73W
12.13W
22.33W
18.43W
14.53W
50.15W
52.15W
52.15W
Introduction
February 2015 | Page 28
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Introduction
Video Matrix Expansion
Output Matrix Expansion
The Platinum IP3 Frame, when used in isolation, provides a 576x1024 matrix with 9 Inputs per Input Slot and 16 Outputs per Output Slot. The number of Outputs can be expanded by distributing Input signals to one or more Frames.
Matrix Expansion Input Modules help distribute input signals across multiple frames that are connected using DensiShield cables. For example, if you route the Inputs of one Frame to a second Frame, you have twice the original number of Outputs (2048). If you route the Inputs to 2 frames, you have three times the number of Outputs (3072).
Figure 6: Matrix Expansion
Input Matrix Expansion
Input Matrix Expansion is achieved by cross-connecting Output Modules across frames. This allows for an increased number of Inputs available for routing to each Output. Through Input Matrix expansion, you can build:
A 1152x1024 router across 2 frames
A 1728x1024 router across 3 frames
A 2304x1024 router across 4 frames
Figure 7: System Expansion
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 29
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Introduction
Combined Input and Output Matrix Expansion
The techniques of Input and Output Matrix Expansion can be combined to produce very large routing systems. Some of the possible configurations are detailed below.
Consult Imagine Communications Customer Support for specific configuration guidance on very large systems.
Figure 8: Combined Matrix and System Expansion
Note: Audio Matrix Expansion, for fully non-blocking configurations, is only supported between two
Platinum IP3 frames.
Alarms and LEDs
Status LEDs on power supply units, resource cards, and various input/output modules are visible when the door is open.
Alarms on various modules are reported to the Platinum IP3 Controller to ease hardware management of the system.
LED indicators reflect the status of sub-systems inside the frame. The indicators for each power supply provide information on each voltage rail and the power supply’s fan. The indicators from each resource module provide status information of the frame’s resource module. These indicators are lit green when the system is functioning properly and red if a failure condition exists.
For details on Alarms and LEDs, see:
Alarm Expansion Module (PX-ALARM) (on page 51)
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 30
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Control Features
Introduction
Platinum IP3 Controller
Your Platinum IP3 router makes use of the most innovative control systems available on the market today. The operating system used for the Platinum IP3 router is a real-time embedded operating system that uses an interrupt-driven and priority-based task scheduling algorithm to control the operations of the Platinum IP3 router. This means that switches will occur in a timely manner, which allows the router to be used in broadcast facilities where timing is crucial to the success of the facility.
The new Control System is the driving force behind the Platinum IP3 routing system. This new control system breaks the traditional constraints of hard levels and fixed partitions, enabling unmatched flexibility in grouping and routing signals according to signal attributes - a key need in complex multichannel audio facilities and mixed HD/SD workflows.
Platinum IP3 Modules can be accessed and controlled via the web-based Platinum IP3 Controller.
For details, see the Platinum IP3 Controller User Manual.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 31
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Modules
Modules
Modules Overview
The Platinum IP3 router's modular architecture consists of separate Input and Output modules - each of which contains 8 or 9 inputs and 8 or 16 outputs - and Crosspoint matrices (redundant crosspoint paths can be configured for robust operation).
Depending on the configuration, one or more modules may be present in the frame for various optional functions.
Input and Output Modules (on page 32 )
Crosspoint Modules (on page 34)
Monitoring Modules
Input and Output Modules
Input and Output modules are front-loadable and hot-swappable. They utilize high-density BNCs (HD-
BNC) through which, physical connections of 576 and 1024 are achieved in 28RU.
Video Frame expansion is achieved by utilizing the secondary switching capabilities of the output card.
Expansion-enabled output cards transmit the required I/O via two DensiShield cables, each of which can transmit eight high speed (differential pair) signals.
Input modules are located on the right side of the frame, and Output modules are located on the left side, as viewed from the front when the front panel door is opened. Both module types are visible from the front when the front panel door is opened.
See PX-IB Input Module General Overview (on page 80 ) for a generic description of Input Modules.
See PX-OB Output Module General Overview for a generic description of Output Modules.
See List of Supported Input and Output Modules (on page 32) for a specific list of modules.
Note: Platinum IP3 modules can be damaged if they are plugged into the wrong back modules or wrong slot. Care should be exercised when plugging modules into the frame
List of Supported Input and Output Modules
Table 7: Platinum IP3 Input and Output Modules
Functional Type
Multichannel Audio
Digital Interface
(MADI) Modules (on
Input Module
PT-MADI4C-IBG
MADI Electrical Input Module
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential.
Output Module
PT-MADI4C-OBG
MADI Output Module with 4 Coaxial
Outputs
February 2015 | Page 32
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Functional Type
Input Module
PT-MADI4O-IBG
MADI Optical Input Module
Analog/Digital Audio
Converter Modules with TDM (on page
PT-ADCT-IB
TDM conversion Input Module. 16 pairs to AES audio in TDM matrix (first
8 copied to wideband matrix)
AES Balanced/Coaxial
Modules with TDM
Capability
PT-AEBT-IB
16 pairs with TDM Support (balanced)
PT-AECT-IB
16 pairs with TDM Support (coaxial)
Frame Synchronizer and
Multiplexer/Demultip lexer Modules (on
PT-FSDMX-IBG
8 channel SD/HD/3G Input Module with Frame Synchronizer and Demux for TDM Audio. 8 BNC inputs.
PT-FSDMXO-IBG
8 channel SD/HD/3G Input Module with Frame Synchronizer and Demux for TDM Audio. 8 Optical inputs through 4 SFP Optical Modules
PT-FSDX8C1D-IBG
8 channel SD/HD/3G Input Module with Frame Synchronizer. For Matrix
Expansion.
PT-DEC-IB
8 Composite signals to SDI.
Analog Composite
Video Modules (on
Digital Video
Modules (on page
PX-HSR9C-IBG
9 channel SD/HD/3G digital video input module with 9 HDBNC connectors
PX-HSR9O-IBG
9 channel SD/HD/3G digital video optical input module with 9 fiber/5
SFP cages.
PX-HSR9C1D-IBG
9 channel SD/HD/3G digital video input module with 9 HDBNC connectors and DS.
Output Module
Modules
PT-MADI4O-OBG
MADI Output Module with 4 Optical
Outputs
PT-DACT-OB
32 Mono Balanced Analog Audio Output
Module (16 stereo pairs) from TDM
PT-AEBT-OB
16 AES Stereo Pair Digital Audio Output
Module. 16 stereo pairs from TDM
(balanced)
PT-AECT-OB
16 AES Stereo Pair Digital Audio Output
Module. 16 stereo pairs from TDM (coaxial)
PX-HSRMX8X-OBG
Frame Synchronizer and Mux Output
Module. 8/16 BNC/Optical outputs.
PT-ENC-OB
8-channel Analog Composite Video output
Modules.
PX-HSR16C-OBG
16-channel digital video SD/HD/3G output module. HDBNC connectors.
PX-HSR16O-OBG
16-channel digital video SD/HD/3G output module. 16 optical outputs through 8 SFP optical devices
PX-HSR8O2DS-OBG
8-channel digital video SD/HD/3G output module. 8 optical SFP outputs plus DS in and out for system expansion.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 33
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Functional Type Input Module
PX-HSR9O1D-IBG
9 channel SD/HD/3G digital video input module with 9 optical connectors and DS.
Modules
Output Module
PX-HSR8C2DS-OBG
8-channel digital video SD/HD/3G output module. HDBNC output connectors plus DS in and out for system expansion
Rear Connectors
Output Rear Connectors
Table 8: Output Rear Connectors
Module Description
PX-HSR16C-OBP 16 HDBNC SD/HD/3G output back panel
PX-HSR8C2DS-OBP 8 HDBNC + 2 DensiShield SD/HD/3G output back panel
Input Rear Connectors
Table 9: Input Rear Connectors
Module Description
PX-HSR9C-IBP 9 HDBNC SD/HD/3G input back panel
PX-HSR9C1D-IBP 9 HDBNC/1 HDBNC output SD/HD/3G Matrix Expansion back panel
Expansion Modules
The Platinum IP3 frame supports expansion modules to provide TDM and Data Fabric interconnect with a second frame when operating in expansion mode. Expansion is achieved using output modules. There must be corresponding output cards in the primary and expansion frames for inputs to be accessible.
For cost effective input expansion, expansion-only output back modules are available.
The Expansion module serves as the physical interface to the DensiShield cable for TDM expansion. It also provides RJ-45 Jacks for GigE interfacing. The Expansion Module plugs in to the bottom two slots, formerly used for output monitoring in the Platinum frame.
Crosspoint Modules
The Platinum IP3 provides redundant crosspoint paths. By using redundant crosspoint modules, a fully
redundant path through the system is available. See Crosspoint Modules (on page 34).
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 34
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
The Platinum IP3 uses unique Video and Audio Crosspoint modules which are not compatible with
Platinum frames.
Modules
Table 10: Crosspoint Modules
Module Description
PX-576X1024- 3G Video Crosspoint Module
See Video Crosspoint Module (PX-576x1024-3G) (on page 61)
PX-ATDM64- X28 TDM Audio Crosspoint Module
See Audio TDM Crosspoint Module (PX-ATDM64-X28) (on page 69)
Monitoring Modules
Output Monitoring Modules
The Platinum IP3 router supports one optional Output Monitoring module.
Table 11: Output Monitoring Modules
Module
PX-HSRAEC-OM
Description
Output Monitoring Module
See PX-HSRAEC-OM Output Monitoring Module (on page 237)
Multiviewer Modules
Table 12: Multiviewer Modules
Module Description
HV-SXP-16×3
HV-SXP-16×3-O
HV-SXP-32×6
HV-SXP-32×6 -O
HV-SXP-64×6
HV-SXP-64×6-O
Single-slot Platinum SX Pro with 16 input channels, three HDMI outputs, and three SDI outputs
Single-slot Platinum SX Pro with 16 input channels, three SDI outputs, and three (fiber) optical SDI outputs
Two-slot Platinum SX Pro with 32 input channels and
HDMI outputs and six SDI outputs
Two-slot Platinum SX Pro with 32 input channels, six
SDI outputs, and six optical SDI outputs
Four-slot Platinum SX Pro with 64 input channels, six
HDMI outputs, and six SDI outputs
Four-slot Platinum SX Pro with 32 input channels, six
SDI outputs, and six (fiber) optical SDI outputs
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 35
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Resource Module (PX-RES)
Resource Module (PX-RES)
Resource Module (PX-RES) Overview
The PX-RES Resource Module serves as the central control point for the Platinum IP3 frame and all modules that reside in the frame. The PX-RES is a control module with software and hardware components that control communications between the different processing modules (Input, Output,
Crosspoint, Fans, Power Supplies) in an IP3 frame. It also enables communication with the Platinum IP3
Controller for configuration, control, monitoring, and routing.
The PX-RES module provides the sync processing necessary to determine the switch timing for the frame. The control system reports the presence and type of sync signal detected on each of the four
SYNC inputs. The PX-RES module distributes the synchronization signals to all the crosspoint, and output monitoring modules in the frame. It also automatically generates and distributes an internal synchronization signal when no external sync input is present.
Figure 9: PX-RES Resource Module
PX-RES in a Platinum frame
The PX-RES Resource Module (1.5.0 or higher) can also be used in a Platinum 9 RU or 15 RU frame. With
PX-RES in the Platinum frame, not all modules are supported.
The following table details support for various PX and PT input/output modules when PX-RES is used in a
Platinum (9/15 RU) frame and when it's used in an IP3 frame.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 36
(PX) Output Modules
PX-HSR16C-OBG
PX-HSR8C2D-OBG
PX-HSR8O2D-OBG
PX-HSR16O-OBG
PX-HSRSXP2D-OBG
PX-HSRMX8C2D-OBG
PX-HSRMX8O2D-OBG
PX-HSR8CMX8C-OBG
PX-HSR8OMX8O-OBG
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Module PX-RES in
Platinum
(PX) Input Modules
PX-HSR9C-IBG
PX-HSR9C1D-IBG
PX-HSR9O-IBG
PX-HSR9O1D-IBG
PX-HSR8C-IBG
PM-HSR8C-IBG
PX-HSR2C2D-IBG
PX-HSR1C1D-IBG
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential.
PX-RES in
IP3
Module
(PT) Input Modules
PT-ADCT-IB
PM-ADCT-IB
PT-AEBT-IB
PM-AEBT-IB
PT-AECT-IB
PM-AECT-IB
PT-DEC-IB
PM-DEC-IB
PT-FSDMX-IBG/ PT-FSDMXO-IBG
PT-FSDX8C1D-IBG
PT-FSDX8O1D-IBG
PT-HS-IB+
PT-HSO-PIN-IB+ (PT-HSO-IB+)
PT-HSR1D-IBG/ PT-HSR2D-IBG
PT-HSR8C1D-IBG
PT-HSR8O1D-IBG
PT-MADI4C-IBG/ PT-MADI4O-IBG
(PT) Output Modules
PT-AEBT-OB
PM-AEBT-OB
PT-AECT-OB
PM-AECT-OB
PT-DACT-OB
PM-DACT-OB
PT-ENC-OB
PM-ENC-OB
PT-HSR-OB+
PM-HSR-OB+
PT-HSR-OBG+
PM-HSR-OBG+/ PT-HSRO-OBG+
PT-HSRMX8C-OBG
PT-HSRMX8O-OBG
Resource Module (PX-RES)
PX-RES in
Platinum
PX-RES in IP3
February 2015 | Page 37
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
(PX) Frame Modules
PX-576x1024-3G
PX-ALARM-ATDM
PX-ALARM-DATA
PX-ATDM64-X28
PX-FRONT-FAN
PX-HSRAEC-OM
PX-RES
Multiviewer Modules
PX-SXP-16x3
PX-SXP-32x6
PX-SXP-64x6
PX-SXP-16x3-O
PX-SXP-32x6-O
PX-SXP-64x6-O
PX-SXP-16x3-OD
PX-SXP-32x6-OD
PX-SXP-64x6-OD
PX-RES Parameters and Upgrades
For details, refer the Platinum IP3 Controller User Manual.
PT-MADI4C-OBG/PT-MADI4O-OBG
PT-SR-OBG+/ PM-SR-OBG+
(PT) Frame Modules
PM-64x64-3G9
PM-128x128-3G9
PT-128x256-3G15
PT-ALARM
PM-ATDM16-X9
PT-ATDM16-X15
PT-HSRAEC-OM
PT-SYNC
Resource Module (PX-RES)
PX-RES Redundancy
Each Platinum IP3 frame can have up to two PX-RES modules operating redundantly. If one module detects failure of the other, it switches over control and continues router operation.
The Resource module and optional Redundant Resource module are located in the middle of the frame.
Resource modules are visible when the front panel door is opened.
The PX-RES module is divided into three main areas:
Processing
System Interfaces
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 38
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Communications Back Panel (PX-CBP)
Resource Module (PX-RES)
The PX-CBP communications back panel provides an interface between communications connectors and
Resource Modules. All control ports remain inactive until, and only if, the router has fully booted and has established communications.
Even in a powered-down state, a router connected to any communications system must not interfere with that system, and therefore must not violate the communications standard (RS-232, RS-422, IEEE
802, etc.) when in this state.
A temperature sensor on the PX-CBP monitors the external ambient temperature.
Figure 10: PX-CBP Communication Back Panel
The following connector types are available on the PX-CBP module:
Four Ethernet Ports (on page 40 )
Four Sync Ports (on page 41) with looping connectors
Two XY Ports (on page 45) with loop through
One LTC Bi-Directional Port (on page 42)
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 39
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
User Interfaces
Resource Module (PX-RES)
Ethernet Ports
There are 4 Ethernet connectors available to users on the Communication Backplane (PX-CBP), labeled from 1 to 4:
Figure 11: Ethernet Ports on the PX-CBP Back Panel
Ethernets 1 and 2 are connected to the PX-RES in Slot 1 (Top slot)
Ethernets 3 and 4 are connected to the PX-RES in Slot 2 (Bottom slot)
Only the Active PX-RES Module’s Ethernet ports are active.
Ethernet ports on standby PX-RES modules are disabled but still physically connected (link LEDs function correctly).
Rear Ethernet Ports
IP Address 1
IP Address 2
192.168.100.250
192.168.101.250
Changing the Default IP Address of the Rear Ethernet Ports
Ethernet settings can be changed via the Controller. To do this:
1. Launch the Platinum IP3 Controller UI in a web browser, select your Platinum IP3 Frame, and click
Go to Device.
2. Click the Configure Frame link in the top right hand corner.
3. Select Ethernet Ports from the menu on the left and make changes on the right.
Note: Ethernet parameters suffixed with "1" refer to PX-RES 1, and parameters suffixed with "2" refer to PX-RES 2. Both PX-RES modules use the same IP addresses. However, the Ethernet ports of the standby PX-RES are disconnected internally to avoid address collision with the active PX-RES.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 40
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
4. Select Yes against Save.
Resource Module (PX-RES)
Front Ethernet Ports
There is an Ethernet port on the front of each Resource Module (PX-RES). This Ethernet port can be used for configuring each Resource Module. The default (hard coded) IP addresses are as follows:
Table 13: Front Ethernet Ports
PX-RES 1 (Primary)
IP Address 1
IP Mask 1
Gateway Address 1
169.254.3.126
255.255.255.0
169.254.3.1
PX-RES 2 (Secondary/Redundant)
IP Address 2
IP Mask 2
Gateway Address 2
169.254.3.127
255.255.255.0
169.254.3.1
Sync Ports
Each PX-CBP module includes four looping sync inputs. Each sync input automatically detects and locks to NTSC, PAL, analog HD Tri-Level, or AES signals. The control system reports the presence and type of sync signal detected on each of the four inputs. These synchronization signals are made available to and are distributed by the Resource Modules to every crosspoint and output monitoring I/O module in the frame.
Sync signals distributed from the Resource Module remain undisturbed when switching over to a redundant Resource Module. In addition, Resource Modules automatically generate and distribute an internal synchronization signal when no external sync input is present.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 41
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Resource Module (PX-RES)
If needed, optional Sync Distribution Modules may be added to the frame to distribute external and internal sync signals to all Input/Output modules. These Sync Distribution Modules also support redundant operation, and have the capability to seamlessly switch over when the redundant module is removed.
For user configurable references, 4 discrete syncs or 2 syncs with redundant inputs are supported
Sync triggering supported based on reference detection
If no sync signals present, switches occur asynchronously after a reasonable time-out period (<0.1 seconds from reception of command)
For Sync references that are present but then removed or lost, the router maintains relative vertical interval switching until a reference is detected
Also See Switch Triggering (on page 48).
Alarm Port
Reserved for future use.
LTC Bi-Directional Port
Reserved for future use.
LEDs
The following LEDs are present on the module:
Power
Active Card
Ethernet 1 Activity LED
Ethernet 2 Activity LED
2 Alarm LEDs
Table 14: LEDs on the Resource Module
LED DESCRIPTION
POWER
Power Supply Indicator
Green
ENET1 (LINK) Green
ENET2 (LINK) Green
When lit, this indicates that 24V is enabled on this board.
Indicates there is an active connection on Ethernet Port #1
Indicates there is an active connection on Ethernet Port #2
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 42
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
LED DESCRIPTION
ALARM1
ALARM2
Off
Red
Amber
Flashing Red
Flashing Amber
Resource Module (PX-RES)
ALARM2 LED blinks amber when synchronization between
the active and standby PX-RES is in progress.
ALARM2 LED turns red if the synchronization process fails
ALARM1 LED blinks amber when a user sets the frame identifying LLDC parameter
ALARM1 is lit amber when the PX-RES is in fail-safe mode
ACTRES This module is the Active Resource Module controlling the frame and communicating to the Ethernet ports.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 43
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Resource Module (PX-RES)
There are nine LEDs behind the Card-edge Ejector handle. All of these LEDs should be ON when the
POWER LED is ON. If any one of them is OFF, it indicates a problem with a power circuit on the module.
Figure 12: Power LEDs
Fuses
Figure 13: Fuses on the PX-RES Resource Module
Fuses on the PX-RES Resource Module
Fuse Name Fuse Type
F1
F2
Slowblow
Slowblow
Fuse Rating
2 Amps
2 Amps
Part Number
127-100001Q00
127-100001Q00
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 44
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Fuse Name Fuse Type
F3 Slowblow
Fuse Rating
2 Amps
DIP Switches
Part Number
127-100001Q00
Resource Module (PX-RES)
The RESET push button is a system reset.
On SW4, pins 1 and 2 are used to force the module to failsafe boot.
XY Ports
Note: The two XY ports on the rear of the Platinum IP3 frame are not used or supported in the initial release of Platinum IP3 . If coaxial XY protocol is required in a system, the Imagine Communications
EDGE Router Protocol Translator can be used to interface coaxial XY networks with the Platinum IP3
Control System.
Serial Ports
Note: The rear of the Platinum IP3 frame has 2 RS232 / RS422 Ports that do not support the XY protocol in the Platinum IP3 System Release 1.0. If Serial XY protocol is required in a system, the EDGE Router
Protocol Translator can be used to interface serial XY with the Platinum IP3Control System.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 45
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
RSS-232 Pin Assignments
Table 15: RS-232 Signal Format Pin Assignments
4
5
6
7
8
9
2
3
Pin Function
1 Frame Ground
RxD (Data received by router)
TxD (Data sent by router)
Data Terminal Ready*
Ground
Data Set Ready (DSR)*
Request to Send (RTS)**
Clear to Send (RTS)**
Frame Ground
* Pins 4 and 6 connected internally.
** Pins 7 and 8 connected internally
RSS-422 Pin Assignments
Table 16: RS-422 Signal Format Pin Assignments
Resource Module (PX-RES)
Pin
7
6
8
1
2
Signal (Tributary)
FG
Ta (Tx-)
Tb (Tx+)
Tc
Ra (Rx-)
Description
Connection to Remote
Computer (Controller)
Frame ground
Transmitted data
(twisted pair)
Frame ground
Ra (Rx-)
Rb (Rx+)
Received data shield Received data shield
Received data Ta (Tx-)
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 46
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Resource Module (PX-RES)
Pin Signal (Tributary) Description
3
4
9
5
Rb (Rx+)
Rc
FG
SP
(twisted pair)
Transmitted data shield
Frame ground
(Not connected)
Connection to Remote
Computer (Controller)
Tb (Tx+)
Transmitted data shield
Frame ground
(Not connected)
Resource Card Synchronization
In normal operating mode, all parameter and route changes are synchronized from the Active/Master
PX-RES to the Standby PX-RES.
When upgrading PX-RES firmware, images are also synchronized. If the alternate firmware image is activated on the active PX-RES, the alternate image on the standby PX-RES also becomes active.
If there is only a single PX-RES in the frame, the PX-RES Synchronization parameter is set to Yes and disabled (grayed out).
If a new PX-RES is inserted into the spare slot, the active PX-RES transfers all its content to the new standby PX-RES and the PX-RES Synchronization parameter is then enabled.
If the PX-RES Synchronization parameter is set to No, all the synchronization stops. Routes and parameter information of the standby PX-RES will remain as is.
Active and Standby Determination
Active and Standby states are non-volatile.
An active PX-RES remains active after a power cycle.
The standby PX-RES only becomes active if the active PX-RES is removed or in case of manual failover.
If two PX-RES modules are inserted into a frame and powered up at the same time, the PX-RES in the top slot will have higher priority.
Sync Notes
There are 4 available sync references that can each be turned on or off by Sync Enable parameters.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 47
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Resource Module (PX-RES)
The Sync Mode parameter (set to Auto by default) allows for configuration of switching point settings. In Auto mode, the output switches relative to the detected sync reference assigned to the module.
If Sync Mode is set to Standard, the Sync Reference parameter can be used to specify the sync standard to use as the reference signal. The output switches relative to the specified reference.
If Sync Mode is set to Advanced, the Sync Pulse Delay parameter can be used to specify where the output switching point is relative to the reference signal. The delay is in units of microseconds.
Figure 14: Sync Mode Parameter (IP3 Controller GUI)
Switch Triggering
Switch triggering supports the use of independent AES, NTSC, PAL, and tri-level HD references.
The following reference types are supported:
2
3
4
5
Table 17: Switch Triggering: Supported Reference Types
0 Unknown or Missing Reference Line 10
1 Analog 525/60 Line 10
Analog 525/60 /1.001
Analog 625/50
1920x1080/60I
1920x1080/60I /1.001
Line 6
Line 7
Line 7
Line 7
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 48
22
23
24
25
26
27
18
19
20
21
14
15
16
17
8
9
10
11
12
13
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
6 1920x1080/50I
7 1920x1080/30P
1920x1080/30P /1.001
1920x1080/25P
1920x1080/24P
1920x1080/24PsF
1920x1080/24P /1.001
1920x1080/24PsF /1.001
1280x720/60P
1280x720/60P /1.001
1280x720/50P
1280x720/30P
1280x720/30P /1.001
1280x720/25P
1280x720/24P
1280x720/24P /1.001
720x483/60P
720x576/50P
720x483/60P /1.001
1920x1080/60P
1920x1080/60P /1.001
1920x1080/50P
Line 7
Line 7
Line 7
Line 7
Line 7
Line 7
Line 7
Line 7
Line 7
Line 7
Line 7
Line 7
Line 7
Line 7
Line 7
Line 7
Line 10
Line 6
Line 10
Line 7
Line 7
Line 7
Resource Module (PX-RES)
The following reference types are supported but need to be manually configured since they are not automatically detected because of the Horizontal and Vertical rates.
Table 18: Switch Triggering: Reference Types that need to be manually configured
28 720x576/50I Line 6
(alias of Analog 625/50)
29 960x576/50I Line 6
(alias of Analog 625/50)
30 720x483/60I
31
32
720x483/60I /1.001
960x483/60I
Line 10
(alias of Analog 525/60)
Line 10
(alias of Analog 525/60 /1.001)
Line 10
(alias of Analog 525/60)
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 49
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
33 960x483/60I /1.001
34
35
36
1920x1080/30PsF
1920x1080/30PsF /1.001
1920x1080/25PsF
Resource Module (PX-RES)
Line 10
(alias of Analog 525/60 /1.001)
Line 7
(alias of 1080/60I)
Line 7
(alias of 1080/59.94I)
Line 7
(alias of 1080/50I)
Alarms
All alarms are off by default, except for critical temperature alarms. Individual alarms can be turned on or off. The following error conditions can trigger an alarm:
Loss of input or output signal
Power supply failure
Fan failure or missing front fan modules
Video crosspoint reaching critical temperature
PX-RES synchronization failure
Power Consumption
Table 19: PX-RES Power Consumption
24V Power Rail 15W
5V Power Rail 0W
Total Power 15W each
Modules in Frame 2 (Primary and Redundant)
Installation
All communications back panel modules are installed at Imagine Communications' manufacturing facility
The module is replaceable, however, all control and communication with the frame will be lost when it is replaced. If you need to upgrade or replace this module, please contact our Customer Service
Department.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 50
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Alarm Expansion Module (PX-ALARM)
Alarm Expansion Module (PX-
ALARM)
PX-ALARM Overview
The Alarm Expansion module (PX-ALARM) controls and monitors the Front and Rear Fan modules and monitors the GPI Inputs and Power Supplies. Additionally, the PX-ALARM has Densishield connectors for
Audio matrix expansion (to connect to a second IP3 frame).
The PX-ALARM module reports the status of the Fans (Tachometer reading), Internal and External Power
Supply Alarms, and GPI Inputs, to the IP3 Controller via the Resource Module (PX-RES), and to LEDs and possibly to GPI Outputs on the PX-ALARM (back of the Platinum IP3 frame).
The PX-ALARM can control four GPI Outputs.
The module is located to the mid-left of the Platinum IP3 frame, and is accessible from the rear of the frame. The module is hot-swappable but when unplugged from the frame, the Front and Rear Fans speed will increase to 100%. The PX-ALARM controls the speed of the fans based on power supply loading.
Figure 15: PX-ALARM Module in an Platinum IP3 Frame
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 51
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Alarm Expansion Module (PX-ALARM)
Figure 16: PX-ALARM Module
PX-ALARM Components
The PX-ALARM module consists of two cards assembled together as a single module (PX-ALARM), and plugged into the rear of the Platinum IP3 frame.
PX-ALARM-ATDM
PX-ALARM-DATA
Audio TDM Expansion and Alarm Card
Data Expansion and Alarm Card
The Platinum IP3 frame has two rows of connectors for the PX-ALARM module. Each slot consists of one
60-pin and one 140-pin Samtec card-edge connector. The PX-ALARM-DATA card goes into one slot, and the PX-ALARM-ATDM card goes into the other one. Both are assembled as a single module and inserted into the frame.
Audio Expansion
A single Platinum IP3 frame has 64 input slots and 8SDI inputs per slot. If you assume 16 embedded audio channels per SDI signal, that is a total of 8192 mono audio channels. The size of the Audio and
Data Routing matrix can be further increased through expansion.
Audio Channels from one Platinum IP3 frame can be made available to a second Platinum IP3 frame. The audio channels are sent from the Audio TDM Crosspoint module to the PX-ALARM module’s DensiShield outputs.
Note: When interconnecting two Platinum IP3 frames for Audio Expansion, the Audio TDM Crosspoints in the Top slots of both Frames must be connected together and likewise the Crosspoints in the Bottom slots must be connected together. The 'TOP XPT' 'OUT1' DensiShield connector on IP3 frame #1 is connected to the 'TOP XPT' 'IN1' DensiShield connector on Platinum IP3 cable and vice-versa.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 52
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Controlling Fan Speed
Alarm Expansion Module (PX-ALARM)
Under normal operating conditions fan speed is controlled by power consumption of the frame (which directly corresponds to heat generated in the frame), and ambient temperature. The more cooling that is required the faster the fans will spin.
The following conditions will trigger the fan speeds to increase:
Failure of a Rear Fan Module
Loss of communication to the Resource module (PX-RES)
PX-ALARM Module failure
Unplugging the PX-ALARM module from the IP3 frame
Upgrading the PX-ALARM Module's firmware
Reporting Alarms and Fan Failures
PX-ALARM monitors the status signal of core components and reports any instance of a critical failure.
Reporting is done to the Platinum IP3 Controller via the Resource card (PX-RES) and to the GPI Outputs and LEDs.
Table 20: Summary of GPIs on the PX-ALARM module
Alarm Type
User-Definable (GPI Output) Alarms_
(see "User-Definable (GPI Output)
Alarms" on page 54)(Outputs 1-4)
User-Definable (GPI Input) Alarms_
(see "User-Definable (GPI Input)
Alarms" on page 54)(Inputs 1-3)
Fan Failure Alarm (on page 54)
Alarm Details
The alarm module communicates directly to the resource module via the proprietary PIPE (singlewire serial) interface. This communication provides access to any status signal reported in the entire frame.
Ability to monitor legacy equipment alarm/failures and report these failures through control software such as Navigator
3
Fan (Module) Fail 1
Number of
Alarms
4
Power Supply Failure Alarm (on page
PS Fail 1
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 53
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
User-Definable (GPI Output) Alarms
Alarm Expansion Module (PX-ALARM)
On user-defined GPI outputs 1 through 4, the Resource Module (PX-RES) communicates the status of any alarm conditions within the IP3 frame to the PX-ALARM module, to assert/trigger the GPI Outputs.
When a GPI Output is asserted, the corresponding GPO LED is lit on the PX-ALARM module.
Figure 17: User Definable Alarms
User-Definable (GPI Input) Alarms
User-defined inputs 1 to 3 provide the ability to monitor legacy equipment alarm/ failures and to report these failures to the Controller via the Resource card (PX-RES). If any GPI Input is asserted, the corresponding GPI Input LED on the PX-ALARM module will be lit.
Fan Failure Alarm
If any of the Front or Rear fan modules have a failure:
This alarm condition is reported to the Platinum IP3 Controller via the Resource card
The FAN ALM LED on the PX-ALARM module is illuminated
The Fan Alarm GPI Output is asserted/triggered.
Power Supply Failure Alarm
Each power supply provides a Power Supply Present signal and three critical alarms: +24V, +5V, and FAN
Failure. All three alarms are critical to power supply and frame operation. If any of these alarms are asserted:
The Platinum IP3 Controller is notified via the Resource card
The PS ALM LED on the PX-ALARM is illuminated red
The dedicated Power Supply Alarm GPI Output is asserted/triggered.
If no alarm conditions exist, the PS ALM LED is not illuminated and GPI Output is not asserted.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 54
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Power Supply Status Monitoring
Alarm Expansion Module (PX-ALARM)
PX-ALARM reports status of all internal and external power supply alarms and power consumption and internal power supply temperature reported over an I2C interface. The I2C signals from the power supplies within the Platinum IP3 frame are connected to the PX-ALARM-ATDM board.
Two External Power Supply frames can be connected to the Platinum IP3 frame via DC power cables.
The DC power cables are connected to the Power Adapter boards. The Alarm and I2C signals from the
External Power Supplies, are routed through the BackPlane/MI to the PX-ALARM-DATA board.
General Purpose Interface (GPI)
GPI connections to the PX-ALARM module are via a Micro DB25 connector on the front card edge of the
PCB. The GPI Inputs are non-isolated inputs. A contact closure to ground asserts/triggers the GPI Input.
Figure 18: GPI Inputs
A 1k Ohm series resistor and clamping diode are connected to each Input, to protect the Input from over voltage.
The GPI Outputs are electrically isolated using a Relay with 3 contacts. Access to all 3 contacts of the relay have been provided to allow for defining the preferred method of signaling critical faults.
Table 21: GPI Output Descriptions
NC Normally closed; contact shorted with common when alarm condition exists or frame not powered.
NO
COMMON
Normally open; contact shorted with common when alarm does not exist and frame is powered
Reed (Return of the Relay)
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 55
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
PX-ALARM
CONTROL
NO
COM
NC
Figure 19: GPI Outputs
Alarm Expansion Module (PX-ALARM)
Figure 20: Micro DSUB connector pin numbering
Micro-Dsub Connector Pinouts
Table 22: GPI Pinout
Pin Description
1 Remote in 3
2 Common (User-defined 1)
3 Normally closed (User-defined 1)
4 Normally open (User-defined 1)
5 Common (User-defined 2)
6 Normally closed (User-defined 2)
7 Normally open (User-defined 2)
8 Common (User-defined 3)
9 Normally closed (User-defined 3)
10 Normally open (User-defined 3)
11 Common (User-defined 4)
12 Normally closed (User-defined 4)
13 Normally open (User-defined 4)
Pin Description
14 Normally closed (Power supply alarm)
15 Normally open (Power supply alarm)
16 Common (Power supply alarm)
17 Normally closed (Fan alarm)
18 Normally open (Fan alarm)
19 Common (Fan alarm)
20 Floating
21 Remote in 1
22 GND (Common in 1)
23 Floating
24 Remote in 2
25 GND (Common in 2 and 3)
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 56
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Parameters
PX-ALARM-DATA Parameters
Alarm Expansion Module (PX-ALARM)
Table 23: PX-ALARM-DATA Parameters
Category Name
Root
PSU
Power Good
PS Alarm
PS Zone Redundancy
(Table Parameter)
Description
Informs the user if board is experiencing any power issues
Type Options
RO No
Yes
Reports if any of the power supplies have failed or if there is a loss of power redundancy.
RO No
Yes
Power zone can supply sufficient power if half the active supplies fail
RO No
Yes
PSU >
Power
Supply
(Table
Parameter)
PS Status
PS Zone The Zone the power supply provides power to.
Zone 1 powers IO card slots 1-16 and control cards.
Zone 2 powers IO card slots 17-32 and control cards.
Zone 3 powers IO card slots 33-
48.
Zone 4 powers IO card slots 49-
62.
RO None
Zone 1
Zone 2
Zone 3
Zone 4
PS +5VL Failed
PS +24VL Failed
Reports if the power supply is providing 5VL power.
Reports if the power supply is providing 24VL power.
RO No
Yes
RO No
Yes
PS Fan Failed Reports if the power supply fan is in working order.
RO No
Yes
RO -55~125C PS Ambient Temperature Reports the temperature of the air coming into the PSU Fan.
PS Secondary
Temperature
PS +5VL Current
Reports the temperature of the air coming out of the PSU Fan.
5V current is being drawn from the power supply.
RO
RO
-55~125C
0~100Amps
PS +24VL Current 24V current is being drawn from the power supply.
RO 0~100Amps
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 57
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Category Name Description
External Alarm Trigger External Alarm Trigger Alarm
(Table
Parameter)
Rear Fans
External Alarm
External Alarm Enable
User Configurable Alarm
(Table Parameter)
Rear Fan Speed
Alarm Expansion Module (PX-ALARM)
Type Options
RW Low
High
Set based on whether the alarm is enabled, GPI status, and trigger value
External Alarm Enable
RO No
Yes
Triggers a GPO to an external system
RW No
Yes
RW No
Yes
Reports the speed in RPM of the fan RO 0-7000rpm
Rear Fan Failed Set to yes if there is a loss of communication to the fan or fan is spinning too slow.
RO No
Yes
Figure 21: PX-ALARM-DATA Parameters
PX-ALARM-ATDM Parameters
Table 24: PX-ALARM-ATDM Parameters
Name Description
Power Good Informs the user if board is experiencing any power issues
Type Options
RO No
Yes
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 58
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Name Description
TDM Cable Present
(Table Parameter)
Set to yes if there is a densishield cable plugged in.
Alarm Expansion Module (PX-ALARM)
Type
RO
Options
No
Yes
Figure 22: PX-ALARM-ATDM Parameters
LED Indicators
Status and Alarm LEDs
The PX-ALARM maintains standard reporting LEDs in addition to the status of alarms. All LEDs are visible from the rear of the frame.
Table 25: Status and Alarm LEDs
LED Reference Function
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
D10
D11
GPO 1: turn reds when GPO output (condition defined by user is asserted true)
GPO 2: turns red when GPO output (condition defined by user is asserted true)
GPO 3: turns red when GPO output (condition defined by user is asserted true)
GPO 4: turns red when GPO output (condition defined by user is asserted true)
GPI Input 1: turns red when GPI Input1 is asserted (contact closure to ground)
GPI Input 2: turns red when GPI input 2 is asserted (contact closure to ground)
Power supply Alarm (PS ALM): turns red when any present power supply’s alarm is asserted/triggered.
Fan Alarm (FAN ALM): turns red when any fans fail
Control LED (CTRL): Initializes red, turns green when communication with the
Resource card (PX-RES) is working.
+24V Power Supply (+24V): turns green when either power is present from either
Zone 1 or 2
GPI Input 1: turns red when GPI Input 3 is asserted (contact closure to ground)
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 59
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Alarm Expansion Module (PX-ALARM)
There are LED indicators on the Resource Module and the Power Supply Modules
Status LEDs indicate power supply status, resource module usage, and link light indicators for
Ethernet communication ports.
Alarm LEDs indicate user defined alarm conditions.
LED indicators reflect the status of subsystems inside the frame. The indicators for each power supply provide information on each voltage rail and the power supply’s fan. The indicators from each resource module provide status information of the frame’s resource module. These indicators are lit green when the system is functioning properly and red if a failure condition exists.
Failsafe Upgrade
Should the PX-ALARM module get corrupted and the Platinum IP3 Controller cannot update the firmware:
Press and hold the Fail Safe A and Fail Safe D for 3 seconds.
Use a paper clip to Press the button on the back of the Alarm module.
Use the Platinum IP3 Controller to update the firmware on the PX-ALARM module.
Power Consumption
Table 26: PX-ALARM Power Consumption
PX-ALARM-ATDM PX-ALARM-DATA
(No Expansion)
24V Power Rail 2W
5V Power Rail 0.35W
Total per Module 2.35W
0.35W
0.35W
0.7W
PX-ALARM-DATA
(Expansion)
6W
0.4W
6.4W
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 60
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Video Crosspoint Module (PX-576x1024-3G)
Video Crosspoint Module (PX-
576x1024-3G)
Video Crosspoint Module (PX-576x1024-3G)
Overview
The PX-576x1024-3G Video Crosspoint Module is the core switching matrix that enables 576x1024 switching within a single Platinum IP3 frame. You can switch any of the 576 input signals to any of the
1024 outputs based on commands from the system control. The module supports AES, SDI (up to 3
Gb/s), and other serial digital signals. The PX-576x1024-3G module also reports on current Crosspoint configuration status.
Figure 23: PX-576x1024-3G Video Crosspoint Module
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 61
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Video Crosspoint Module (PX-576x1024-3G)
Video Crosspoint Module (PX-576x1024-3G) Location in the
Frame
The Platinum IP3 frame includes two slots for Video Crosspoint modules. One slot holds the
Primary/Active Video Crosspoint Module. The second slot holds an optional Redundant/Shadow module, which shadows all operations of the active module, so as to allow it to become active in case the active module is removed or halted due to error. The shadow module’s outputs are disabled until it becomes active, but otherwise performs all operations in parallel with the primary crosspoint module.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 62
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Video Crosspoint Module (PX-576x1024-3G)
Extracting the Video Crosspoint from the Frame
1. On the lower extractor, press the back side of the locking pin while pushing the extractor in.
2. After the extractor releases, pull it down.
3. On the upper extractor, press the back side of the locking pin while pushing the extractor in.
4. After the extractor releases, pull it down.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 63
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
5. While holding back the Fan Module, grasp the upper and lower extractors and pull outward.
Video Crosspoint Module (PX-576x1024-3G)
6. With the extractor handles horizontal, begin sliding the crosspoint module out.
7. Gently remove the Crosspoint Module ensuring that you support it from the middle rather than the front of the module.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 64
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Video Crosspoint Module (PX-576x1024-3G)
Putting the Video Crosspoint back into the Frame
Table 27: Putting the Video Crosspoint Module back into the Frame
When you need to put the
Video Crosspoint Module back into the Frame, note the notch at the bottom that the card should slide into.
Also note the notch at the top.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 65
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Video Crosspoint Module (PX-576x1024-3G)
Video Crosspoint Module Parameters
The Video Crosspoint Module can be accessed and controlled via the web-based Platinum IP3 Controller.
Figure 24: Video Crosspoint Module Parameters
Table 28: PX-576x1024-3G Parameters
Name
Module Status
Enable Power
Description
Displays current status of module.
Type Options
RO
Module Ready
Firmware Upgrade
Required
Module Power
Failure
Module Over
Temperature
This parameter is used to turn the power to the board back on if the board had shutdown due to over temperature.
RW No
Yes
Board Temperature in degrees
Celsius.
RO -40 ~ +140 deg C Board Temperature
(1-2)
(Table Parameter)
Temperature Alarm Indicates if there is a temperature alarm on this board.
Software Version Software version of micro controller
FPGA Version Version of FPGA
RO
RO
RO
Yes
No
<String>
<String>
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 66
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Video Crosspoint Module (PX-576x1024-3G)
LED Indicators on Video Crosspoint Module
The following system indicator LEDs are present on the front edge of the PX-576x1024-3G module:
Table 29: Module System LEDs
LED
DESCRIPTION
POWER Power Supply indicator
Green When lit, this indicates that 24V is enabled on this board.
ACT CTRL Active Control
Red Initializing
Solid Green FPGA has configured and the Resource Module (PX-RES) is communicating with the card.
Flashing
Green
Alarm condition on the card
ACT XPT Active Crosspoint
Yellow When lit, this indicates that this is the Main Crosspoint.
Figure 25: LEDs on the PX-576x1024-3G Video Crosspoint Module
Note: These LEDs are not directly visible on the Video Crosspoint when it is in normal operation since the Front Fan module is in front of the Video Crosspoint. The ACT XPT (Active Crosspoint) LED on the
Front Fan module indicates which Video Crosspoint is the Active (Primary) Crosspoint. The ACT XPT LED will be off on the Front Fan module in front of the Redundant Crosspoint.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 67
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Video Crosspoint Module (PX-576x1024-3G)
Fuses on Video Crosspoint Module
Figure 26: Fuses on the Video Crosspoint Module
Table 30: Fuses on the Video Crosspoint Module
Fuse Name Fuse Type Fuse Rating
FC5 Slowblow 750 mA
Power Consumption
Table 31: PX-576x1024-3G Power Consumption
24V Power Rail 236W
5V Power Rail
Total Power
0.1W
236.1W
Modules in Frame 2 (Primary and Redundant)
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential.
Part Number
127-100004Q00
February 2015 | Page 68
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Audio TDM Crosspoint Module (PX-ATDM64-X28)
Audio TDM Crosspoint Module (PX-
ATDM64-X28)
Overview
The PX-ATDM64-X28 Audio TDM Crosspoint (ATDM) module routes/switches audio signals from Input modules to Output modules, via a proprietary time-division multiplexed (TDM) transport scheme.
The Audio TDM Crosspoint module supports different types of audio transitions when switching from one audio source to another. Transition types such as Quiet switching, V-fade, fade-cut, cut-fade and synchronous switching. The cut associated with the fade-cut and cut-fade transitions are minimum duration fades to eliminate audible switching artifacts. It also allows for certain audio effects for a given destination.
Platinum and Platinum IP3 Routers support all types of audio including Dolby E and AC3. Since audio processing such as quiet switching and gain controls can cause data corruption with non-PCM audio,
Platinum routers support a pass-through mode for these non-PCM sources.
When using the Mux/Demux modules within the router, the audio packets are analyzed when they are demultiplexed. When the system identifies a non-PCM audio source, all processing functionality is disabled. This allows the non-PCM audio data to pass through the router without being corrupted.
The quiet switch capability of the ATDM module is active by default. Since the quiet switch capability can cause corruption for non-PCM audio at the switchpoint, the capability can be turned off for each output of the router using the Controller GUI.
When incoming audio is embedded within a video source, that audio is routed through the Video
(wideband) crosspoint without any processing. The embedded audio, and all ancillary data, is presented at the output exactly as it entered the router.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 69
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Audio TDM Crosspoint Module (PX-ATDM64-X28)
Audio TDM Crosspoint Module (PX-ATDM64-X28) Location in the IP3 Frame
The Platinum IP3 frame includes two slots for Audio TDM Crosspoint modules. One slot holds the
Primary/Active Audio TDM Crosspoint Module. The second slot holds an optional Redundant/Shadow module, which shadows all operations of the active module, so as to allow it to become active in case the active module is removed or halted due to error. The shadow module sets its outputs to a highimpedance state until it becomes active, but otherwise performs all operations in parallel with the primary crosspoint module.
Figure 27: TDM Audio Crosspoint Module in Platinum IP3 frame
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 70
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Audio TDM Crosspoint Module (PX-ATDM64-X28)
Figure 28: PX-ATDM64-X28 Audio Crosspoint Module
Fuses on the PX-ATDM64-X28
Figure 29: Fuses on the PX-ATDM64-X28
Table 32: PX-ATDM64-X28 Fuses
Fuse Name Fuse Type Fuse Rating Present on
PSF1
FC1
Slowblow
Slowblow
4 Amps
0.75 Amps
24V power rail
5V power rail
Part Number
127-100006Q00
127-100004Q00
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 71
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Audio TDM Crosspoint Module (PX-ATDM64-X28)
DIP Switches on the PX-ATDM64-X28
DIP switch SWC2 switch 1, puts the Freescale Kinetis processor into Failsafe mode. To enable Failsafe, move SWC2 switch 1 to the ON position.
After you put the board into Failsafe mode, push the Reset button, SWC1, or power cycle the board by unplugging/plugging the board from the frame. Use the Controller's GUI to upgrade the application.
The following figure shows switch 1,2,3 and 4 in the OFF position. This is the setting that should be used for normal operation. Make sure the jumpers are restored to this position after performing a failsafe upgrade. Switch 2, 3 and 4 are reserved for future use.
Figure 30: DIP Switches on the PX-ATDM64-X28 Module
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 72
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Audio TDM Crosspoint Module (PX-ATDM64-X28)
Fans on the TDM Audio Crosspoint Module (PX-ATDM64-X28)
Figure 31: Fans on the PX-ATDM64-X28
Table 33: PX-ATDM64-X28 Fan Components
Fan Component
Fan Blower
Part Number
131-100006Q00
Fan Mounting Screws (4-40 3/16) 4-40X3/16 PH_Q
Fan Connector P9
Fan Connector P12
Instructions to Replace the Fan Blowers
Using needle-nosed pliers, carefully lift the Fan Connector off the board, taking care not to twist or bend it. Carefully remove the clip that the wire runs through.
1. 1Remove the wire than runs through the clip.
2. 2Remove the 2 Phillips mounting screws and gently lift the fan blower off the board.
3. 3Replace the Fan blower.
4. 4Attach the Fan Connector and wires.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 73
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Audio TDM Crosspoint Module (PX-ATDM64-X28)
Sync References
The ATDM module requires a PT-SYNC module to be installed in the frame for distribution of an internal sync signal, which uses up the SYNC4 distribution path.
SYNC1 and SYNC2 are used for connecting Video References.
PX-ATDM64-X28 Block Diagram
Slot #1 - Outputs 1 to 128
Slot #2 - Outputs 1 to 128
Slot #3 - Outputs 1 to 128
Slot #1 - Inputs 1 to 128
Slot #2 - Inputs 1 to 128
Slot #3 - Inputs 1 to 128
Audio
Crosspoint
(Redundant)
Audio
Crosspoint
(Primary)
Slot #62 - Outputs 1 to 128
Slot #63 - Outputs 1 to 128
Slot #64 - Outputs 1 to 128
Figure 32: PX-ATDM64-X28 Block Diagram
Slot #62 - Inputs 1 to 128
Slot #63 - Inputs 1 to 128
Slot #64 - Inputs 1 to 128
Audio from each Input slot is routed to both ATDM Crosspoints and Outputs from the ATDM Crosspoints are routed to each Output Slot. Both ATDM Crosspoint receive and process audio signals simultaneously.
Functionality
The TDM Audio Crosspoint Module provides the following functionality:
16/20/24 bit Audio Processing
The Audio TDM architecture supports processing of 16-bit, 20-bit, and 24-bit audio samples. Bits per sample are automatically detected by the TDM architecture
Transitions
When switching between 2 audio signals, transitions such as V-Fade, Fade Cut, Cut Fade, and
Synchronous are supported. Transition type and duration are assigned on a per-output basis.
Quiet Switching
Quiet switching between two audio signals is supported as a predefined transition type. Quiet switching is implemented as a v-fade of two signals with minimum duration.
Synchronous Switching
AES streams are switched synchronously, at the AES frame boundary, with respect to a DARS.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 74
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Audio TDM Crosspoint Module (PX-ATDM64-X28)
Asynchronous Signals
Asynchronous inputs are re-sampled to a common reference frequency to avoid periodic adding/dropping of samples.
Level Adjustment
TDM Input/Output Modules support audio level adjustment from -30dBFS to +3dBFS. From -30dBFS to
0, adjustments will occur in 0.5dBFS increments and adjust in 0.33dBFS increments from 0 to +3dBFS.
Sample Rate Conversion (SRC)
The Audio TDM Crosspoint does not Sample Rate Convert (SRC) the audio signals. SRC is done on the
Input Audio TDM modules. Audio sampled at 32 kHz to 96 kHz can be Sample Rate Converted to 48 kHz and locked to the Digital Audio Reference Signals (DARS) connected to the Platinum IP3 frame.
Tone Generator
Audio TDM Input/Output Modules can generate valid AES silence, 500Hz tone, and 1KHz tone.
Polarity Reversal
Audio TDM Input/Output Modules provide a means to correct inverted audio polarity due to incorrect wiring in the analog domain.
Channels Swapping and Summing
Audio TDM Input/Output Modules provide the ability to exchange Left for Right or vice versa of an AES stereo pair. They also provide the ability to average two stereo pairs into a single mono channel.
Redundancy
There are 2 slots in the Platinum IP3 frame for TDM Audio Crosspoint Modules. One is the primary, and the second (redundant) shadows all operations of the primary board. The redundant module becomes active within one video frame of an error occurring or with removal of the active board.
The ATDM modules, in conjunction with the Resource Module (PX-RES), determine which slot contains the Active module. The modules report their current status (primary or secondary) to the control system. Appropriate watchdog circuitry on the module and/or status monitoring on the Resource
Module will monitor the status of the primary module. It is not necessary to remove the primary module to cause the secondary module to become active.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 75
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Frame Expansion
Audio TDM Crosspoint Module (PX-ATDM64-X28)
The Audio TDM architecture enables interconnectivity between two Platinum IP3 frames, expanding to matrix sizes up to 16384x16384, including four AES output monitoring outputs per frame. Each crosspoint send its inputs to the second frame via Densishield cables. The Audio TDM Crosspoints in the top slots in each frame must be connected to each other using Densishield cable. The Crosspoints in the bottom slots must also be connected together.
LED Indicators
The following indicator LEDs are present on the front edge of the PX-ATDM64-X28 module:
Table 34: Module System LEDs
LED DESCRIPTION
POWER
Power Supply indicator
Green When lit, this indicates that 24V is enabled on this board.
ACT CTRL
Active Control
Red Initializing
Solid Green FPGA has configured and the Resource Module
(PX-RES) is communicating with the card
Flashing Green Alarm condition on the card
ACT XPT
PRIMARY
Active Crosspoint
Yellow
Green
When lit, this indicates that this is the Main
Crosspoint
When lit, this indicates the Audio TDM
Crosspoint is driving audio outputs.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 76
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Audio TDM Crosspoint Module (PX-ATDM64-X28)
Figure 33: LEDs on the PX_ATDM64_X28 Crosspoint Module
Below the POWER LED are three other LEDS:
5V_MI
3.3VL_PIPE
3V_MCU
All of these LEDs should be Green when the frame is powered up. If any one of them is not lit, it indicates a power problem on the board or the frame. Check Fuse FC1 (See FC1) to see if its open.
PX-ATDM64-X28 Parameters
Category
Module
Name
Power Status
PCB Rev
Fan Alarm
(Table Parameter)
Fan Running
(Table Parameter)
Description Type Options
Indicates power status. RO Good
Bad
The PCB Revision.
Note: 1-3 are Prototype revisions. 4 is the first released revision.
RO 1
2
3
4
Indicates if Fan Alarm has been set
Indicates whether fans are running
RO Set
RO Disabled
Enabled
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 77
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Category Name
Upgrade from USB
FPGA
Upgrade State
FPGA Rev
FPGA Temp
FPGA Temp Alarm
Audio TDM Crosspoint Module (PX-ATDM64-X28)
Description Type Options
Enabling or Disabling
USB Upgrades
RW Yes
No
No activity The state of any current upgrades
The FPGA Revision RO <String>
The FPGA Temperature RO <String>
FPGA Temperature
Alarm
RO <String>
Figure 34: PX-ATDM64-X28 parameters
Firmware Upgrade
Follow this procedure to upgrade firmware from USB:
1. Extract the IpxAtdmXpt and atdm_board_app.bin files from the ZIP upgrade package (px-atdm-
xpt_1_6.zip) to a folder on the Windows computer (host) being used for the upgrade.
2. Rename atdm_board_app.bin to atdm_board_app.
3. Attach a USB cable from the host to the USB connector on the front of ATDM Crosspoint board.
The first time the USB cable is connected from the host to the ATDM Crosspoint, make sure the
ATDM Crosspoint board shows up as a Portable device (disk) without any warning in the
Window device manager.
4. After a generic USB disk driver is installed, the Windows host will pop up a window prompting for a quick disk format.
5. After the disk is formated, create a folder ATDM on the disk (ATDM crosspoint board)
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 78
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Audio TDM Crosspoint Module (PX-ATDM64-X28)
6. Copy the files IpxAtdmXpt and atdm_board_app from the folder on the host to the ATDM folder in the ATDM Crosspoint
7. After copying the files to the ATDM Crosspoint board, disconnect the USB cable from the ATDM
Crosspoint
8. Re-attach to verify the files were transferred and saved correctly by checking the file sizes match the file sizes on the host.
Power Consumption
Table 35: PX-ATDM64-X28 Power Consumption
24V Power Rail 55W
5V Power Rail 0.8W
Total Power 55.8W
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 79
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Input Modules (PX-IB)
Input Modules (PX-IB)
PX-IB Input Module General Overview
The PX-IB is a generic Video Input Module designed for the IP3 Frame. It supports signals up to 3 Gbps.
The PX-IB Input Module accepts digital video signals, equalizes and retimes data streams, detects standards and formats, and distributes signals to the MI backplane to be switched by the crosspoint matrix. PX-IB input modules are hot-swappable.
The PX-IB accepts an input data stream for each of the nine channels. Cable losses are automatically compensated for, if the cable length is within the maximum length limitation. The maximum cable length is a system specification, not solely dependent on the input card. It is measured by bit error limitation (not jitter).
Figure 35: PX-IB Generic Output Module
PX-IB Input Options
The PX-IB is designed in front module plus back module structure. A single common front module (FM) combines with different back modules to provide several IO variations.
The PX-IB Input Module combines with the following back modules:
PX-HSR9C-IBG Input Module (on page 103 )
PX-HSR9O-IBG Input Module (on page 103)
PX-HSR9C1D-IBG Input Module (on page 104)
PX-HSR9O1D-IBG Input Module (on page 105)
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 80
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
The PX-IB module accepts the following inputs:
Table 36: PX-IB Input Options
Back Module Type
HD-BNC
SFP (optical)
Number of Inputs
Nine Electrical Inputs
Nine Optical Inputs
Input Modules (PX-IB)
PX-IB Expansion
The PX-IB module can also be used with specific back modules intended for expansion. It provides the following for extension:
Looping output of all inputs to extend the routing system to:
More than 512 outputs (Platinum)
More than 1024 outputs (Platinum IP3), in multiple frames form factor.
See:
PX-HSR9C1D-IBG Input Module (on page 104 )
PX-HSR9O1D-IBG Input Module (on page 105)
Inserting Input Modules into the Platinum IP3 frame
Each Input Module may be inserted into, or extracted from, a Platinum IP3 frame while the frame is powered and functioning. The system Controller will recognize the addition or removal of an Input
Module from any of the Input Module slots, and will update the change automatically.
When the Controller recognizes the addition of an Input Module, it will allow the user to control the additional inputs to the matrix.
When inserted into the Platinum IP3 frame, each Input Module mates with a passive connector assembly (back module), mounted in the rear of the frame. This assembly allows a high integrity interconnect between the input cables and the input module, without requiring any active components.
Frames that are not fully populated with input modules when shipped from the factory contain blank covers over the non-populated slots. If an Input Module is added to the frame at a future time, the blank cover must be replaced with the corresponding back module.
Failsafe Mode
To put an Input Module in Failsafe Mode:
1. Unplug the board
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 81
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
2. Set the Failsafe jumper.
3. Wait 10 seconds
4. Insert the board again
The above procedure applies to the following Input Modules
PX-HSR9C-IBG Input Module (on page 103 )
PX-HSR9O-IBG Input Module (on page 103)
PX-HSR9C1D-IBG Input Module (on page 104)
PX-HSR9O1D-IBG Input Module (on page 105)
Input Modules (PX-IB)
Signal Presence and LEDs
Each of the nine input channels on the Input Module provides signal presence reporting via card edge
LEDs and the control software. Both have the ability to be disabled or enabled through the control software, along with a user-selectable hysteresis period.
Module LEDs
See Module LEDs (on page 276).
System LEDs
There are also three system indicator LEDs on the front edge of the module:
Table 37: Module System LEDs
LED DESCRIPTION
INPUT 1-9
Signal Presence
Green
Slow Flash
Solid On
POWER
ACT CTRL
Signal Present
Valid Signal present but not locked
Valid Signal present and locked
Power Supply indicator
Green +24V power rails are operational
Active Control
Red
Solid Green
Initializing
FPGA has configured and the control system is communicating with the card
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 82
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
LED DESCRIPTION
Flashing Green
ACT IN
Active Input Warning
Alarm condition on the card
Yellow Input on card being used by one or more outputs
Note: PX-IB can lock to 270Mbps, 1.5Gbps and 3Gbps video SDI signals.
Input Modules (PX-IB)
Figure 36: LEDs on PX-IB Input Module
Controllable Parameters
For Input Modules, the Controllable Parameters List is a multilevel structure that includes all of the available parameters, arranged into the following groupings:
(Module) Root Level Parameters (on page 84 )
Advanced Parameters (on page 89)
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 83
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Input Modules (PX-IB)
Parameter Notes
Parameters can be enabled and/or changed via CCS Navigator or the Platinum IP3 Controller.
Parameters marked with the [RO] designator are "read-only."
Parameters marked Modules with SFPs Only apply only to optical modules such as PX-HSR9O-IBG
(Module) Root Level Parameters
The following parameters are displayed at the root level (when you click the Module) in the parameter menu list:
Table 38: Module Parameters
Name Description Type Options
Software Version
Sync Select
Software version of micro controller
Selects which physical sync port the module uses as a reference
(Note: Actual signals are not synchronized to the reference. This parameter only affects control timing)
RO <String>
RW 0 (Default)
1
2
3
Temperature Monitor module temperature Unit: deg C
Control FPGA Version Version of FPGA
RO -40 ~ +140 deg C
RO <String>
Module Status
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 84
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Name Description
SFP Type
(For Modules with SFPs
only)
Type Options
Reports the type of SFP RO Invalid SFP
OP+SFP+TT+13+13
OP+SFP+TT+27+29
OP+SFP+TT+31+33
OP+SFP+TT+35+37
OP+SFP+TT+39+41
OP+SFP+TT+43+45
OP+SFP+TT+47+49
OP+SFP+TT+51+53
OP+SFP+TT+55+57
OP+SFP+TT+59+61
NO SFP
Input Modules (PX-IB)
Figure 37: Module Parameters
Input Parameters
Input Parameters are accessed by clicking the Inputs option below the Module in the parameter menu list.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 85
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Input Modules (PX-IB)
Input parameters are grouped into a Table and can be accessed by clicking the Show Table button.
The following parameters are displayed:
Table 39: Input Parameters
Name Description
Signal Presence Reports presence or absence of valid signal
Video Standard Detects video standard
Type Options
RO Yes
No
Unknown
525i 59.94
625i 50
1035i 60
1035i 59.94
1080i 60
1080i 59.94
1080i 50
1080psf 24
1080psf 23.98
1080p 30
1080p 29.97
1080p 25
1080p 24
1080p 23.98
720p 60
720p 59.94
1080p 60
1080p 59.94
1080p 50
1080i 50 295M
720p 50
720p 25
720p 24
720p 23.98
720p 30
720p 29.97
1080p 60 DL
1080p 59.94 DL
1080p 50 DL
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 86
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Name Description
Video Error
Type Options
Detects video standard error in input signal based on the SMPTE
352M packet, if present, and the standard detected by the input card
RO Yes
No
N/A
EQ Bypass
Reclocker Mode
Lock Detect
Rate Detect
Mute
Sets the EQ mode
Sets the reclock mode to automatic or bypass or to one of three manual fixed rates
RW Auto (Default)
3G
HD
SD
Bypass
Reports if data is relocked by reclocking stage
RW On
Off (Default)
Detects data rate
Mutes the output of the board
RO Yes
No
RO Unknown
SD
HD
3G
RW Yes
No (Default)
EDH Presence
Input EDH Error
Input Optical Power
(Modules with SFPs
only)
EDH package present in input SD signal
RO Yes
No
N/A
EDH error present in input SD signal RO Yes
No
N/A
Reports input optical signal power level
RO Too Low
-32 - 1 dBm
Too High
CRC/EDH Error Fields Shows CRC/EDH errors RO 0 ~ 65535
CRC/EDH Counter
Control
Enables or disables the CRC/EDH
Error Fields counter and the Video
Error detector
CRC/EDH Error Clear Clear CRC/EDH error counter
RW Enable (Default)
Disable
RW Yes
No (Default)
Input Modules (PX-IB)
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 87
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Name Description
Input Modules (PX-IB)
Signal Input Range In normal operation, input EQ is set to compensate cable loss where at the other end of the cable, the driver outputs 800mVpp.
If a passive splitter is present on the input side of the module, set this to
Small (400mVpp).
Type Options
Normal (800mVpp)
Small (400mVpp)
EQ Power Save
Mode
Puts equalizer into power save mode
RW Auto (Default)
Disable
Force
Figure 38: Inputs Parameters
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 88
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Advanced Parameters
Input Modules (PX-IB)
Advanced Parameters are accessed by clicking the Advanced option in the parameter menu list.
Table 40: Input Modules - Advanced Parameters
Name Description Type Options
Parameter Hysteresis Sets hysteresis for parameters needing it.
This parameter works as time constant of low pass filter of status reporting, to ease CCS communication in case there is a flickering status report. It can be changed as required.
RW 0 - 10000000 (2000000)
Figure 39: Input Modules - Advanced Parameters
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 89
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Specifications
Technical Specifications
Table 41: Input Module - Technical Specifications
Item
Input Connector
Impedance
Description
75 Ohm BNC per IEC 169-8
75 Ohm HD-BNC
LC optical
DensiShield
75 Ohms (BNC, HD-BNC)
100 Ohms differential (DensiShield)
Signal type
SMPTE 424M, SMPTE 292M, SMPTE 259M,
SMPTE 344M, DVB-ASI
Most other < 1Vpp digital signals, 3Mb/s to
3.0Gb/s
Maximum input level
880mV (BNC, HD-BNC)
Optical 0dBm typical (based on GO2927/2917)
Return loss (BNC, HD-BNC)
> 15dB, up to 1.485GHz
> 10dB, 1.485GHz to 2.97GHz
Equalization (BNC, HD-BNC)
Automatic
400m Belden 1694A for 270Mb/s data rate
200m Belden 1694A for 1.485Gb/s data rate
150m Belden 1694A for 2.97Gb/s data rate
Optical input sensitivity
-20dBm (based on OP+SFP+RR/OP+SFP+R)
Capacity
Table 42: Input Module - Capacity
Number of Inputs
From rear edge of module 9
Number of Outputs
To MI connector
To rear edge of module
18
9 (optional)
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential.
Input Modules (PX-IB)
February 2015 | Page 90
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Control
Input Modules (PX-IB)
Control Requirements
All settings for the input circuitry are reset to the input slot’s configuration on module insertion. Settings follow module location, not modules themselves. This way, modules can be moved from slot to slot without the need to reconfigure the input parameters.
Applications Integration
The Magellan CCS Control System supports each input module via the Magellan CCS Navigator architecture with the router module installed, and is available for control and monitoring from any
Imagine Communications- or SNMP-supported control application.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 91
Optical Loop BM
SFP 1
SFP 2
SFP 3
SFP 4
SFP 5
DensiShield
8 Channels
Out 9
In 3
In 4
In 5
In 6
In 7
In 8
BNC BM
In 1
In 2
HD-BNC Loop BM
In 1
In 6
In 7
In 8
In 9
In 2
In 3
In 4
In 5
IN 9
DensiShield
8 Channels
Out 9
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Block Diagram
In 7
In 8
In 9
HD-BNC BM
In 1
In 2
In 3
In 4
In 5
In 6
IN 1
IN 2
IN 3
EQ
LMH0394
EQ
LMH0394
EQ
LMH0394
PX-IB-FM Block Diagram
SERDES
GS2960
SERDES
GS2960
SERDES
GS2960
EQ
LMH0394
SERDES
GS2960
IN 4
DS BM
DensiShield
8 Channels
HD BNC
In 9
Optical BM
SFP 1
SFP 2
SFP 3
SFP 4
SFP 5
IN 5
IN 6
IN 7
IN 8
EQ
LMH0394
EQ
LMH0394
EQ
LMH0394
EQ
LMH0394
SERDES
GS2960
SERDES
GS2960
SERDES
GS2960
SERDES
GS2960
Mindspeed
40x40
M21125
EQ
LMH0394
SERDES
GS2960
OPT 2 only
CD
GS2988
CD
GS2988
CD
GS2988
CD
GS2988
CD
GS2988
CD
GS2988
CD
GS2988
CD
GS2988
CD
GS2988
Local I2C Controls Monitoring
Card health and signal presence
LEDs
PIPE
PRTI
Power failure monitoring
+24VA
+24VB
On-board
Supply
+5VL
Control
Logic
+3.3V / 7A
+2.5V / 1.5A
+1.2V / 3A
+3.3VL
Max 1400mVpp
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential.
OUT 4A
OUT 4B
OUT 5A
OUT 5B
OUT 6A
OUT 6B
OUT 7A
OUT 7B
OUT 8A
OUT 8B
OUT 9A
OUT 9B
OUT 1A
OUT 1B
OUT 2A
OUT 2B
OUT 3A
OUT 3B
Input Modules (PX-IB)
February 2015 | Page 92
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Output Modules (PX-OB)
Output Modules (PX-OB)
PX-OB Output Module General Overview
The PX-OB is a generic, Video Output Module designed for the IP3 Frame.
PX-OB modules recondition SDI video received from crosspoint modules before distributing to various output interfaces - such as standard BNC coaxial cables, HD-BNC coaxial cables, and SFP optical fiber. PX-
OB output modules are hot-swappable.
Each PX-OB output module provides a maximum of16 output signal channels.Output modules accept 32 signals from the crosspoint matrix. Each output channel also contains an output monitoring path which feeds the output signal seen on any channel back to an optional rear-mounted output monitoring card.
Figure 40: PX-OB Generic Output Module
PX-OB Output Options
The PX-OB is designed in front module plus back module structure. A single common front module (FM) combines with different back modules to provide several IO variations.
The PX-OB Output Module combines with the following back modules:
PX-HSR16C-OBG Output Module
PX-HSR16O-OBG Output Module
PX-HSR8C2DS-OBG Output Module
PX-HSR8O2DS-OBG Output Module
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 93
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Table 43: PX-OB Output Options
Back Module Type Number of Outputs
HD-BNC
SFP (optical)
Sixteen Electrical Outputs
Sixteen Optical Outputs
Output Modules (PX-OB)
PX-OB Expansion
PX-OB also provides a router expansion (8 input channels) interface using DensiShield.
See PX-HSR8C2DS-OBG Output Module and PX-HSR8O2DS-OBG Output Module.
Inserting Output Modules into the IP3 frame
Each Output Module may be inserted into, or extracted from, a IP3 frame while the frame is powered and functioning. The system Controller will recognize the addition or removal of an Output Module from any of the Output Module slots, and will update the change automatically. When the Controller recognizes the addition of an Output Module, it allows the user to control the additional inputs to the matrix.
When inserted into the IP3 frame, each Output Module mates with a passive connector assembly (back module), mounted in the rear of the frame. This assembly allows a high integrity interconnect between the input cables and the input module, without requiring any active components. Frames that are not fully populated with modules when shipped from the factory contain blank covers over the nonpopulated slots. If an Output Module is added to the frame at a future time, the blank cover must be replaced with the corresponding back module.
Note: IP3 modules can be damaged if they are plugged into the wrong back modules or wrong slot. Care should be exercised when plugging modules into the frame.
Failsafe Mode
To put an Output Module in Failsafe Mode:
1. Unplug the board
2. Set the Failsafe jumper.
3. Wait 10 seconds
4. Insert the board again
The above procedure applies to the following Output Modules
PX-HSR16C-OBG Output Module
PX-HSR16O-OBG Output Module
PX-HSR8C2DS-OBG Output Module
PX-HSR8O2DS-OBG Output Module
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 94
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Signal Presence and LEDs
Output Modules (PX-OB)
Each of the channels on the Output Module provide signal presence reporting via card edge LEDs and the control software. Both have the ability to be disabled or enabled through the control software, along with a user-selectable hysteresis period.
Figure 41: System LEDs on PX-OB Output Module
System LEDs
There are 3 system indicator LEDs on the front edge of the module:
Table 44: Module System LEDs
LED DESCRIPTION
OUTPUT 1-16
Signal Presence
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 95
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
LED DESCRIPTION
Green
POWER
Power Supply indicator
Signal Present
Green +24V power rails are operational
ACT CTRL
Active Control
Red
Solid Green
Flashing Green
Output Modules (PX-OB)
Initializing
FPGA has configured and the control system is communicating with the card
Alarm condition on the card
ACT OUT
Active Output Warning
Yellow Output on card being used by one or more outputs
Module LEDs
See Module LEDs.
Controllable Parameters
For Output Modules, the Controllable Parameters List is a multilevel structure that includes all of the available parameters, arranged into the following groupings.
(Module) Root Level Parameters (on page 97 )
Output Parameters (on page 97)
Advanced Parameters (on page 99)
Parameter Notes
Parameters can be enabled and/or changed via CCS Navigator or the IP3 Controller.
Parameters marked with the [RO] designator are "read-only."
Parameters marked Expansion Modules Only apply only to expansion modules such as PX-
HSR8O2DS-OBG Output Module and PX-HSR8C2DS-OBG Output Module
Parameters marked Modules with SFPs Only apply only to optical modules such as PX-HSR16O-OBG
Output Module.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 96
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
(Module) Root Level Parameters
Output Modules (PX-OB)
The following parameters are displayed at the root level (when you click the Module) in the parameter menu list:
Table 45: Output Modules - Root Parameters
Name Description
Software Version Software version of micro controller
Control FPGA Version Version of FPGA
SFP Type
(Table Parameter)
(Modules with SFPs
only)
Reports the type of SFP
Module Status
Sync Select Selects which physical sync port the module uses as a reference
Type Options
RO <String>
RO <String>
RO
Invalid SFP
OP+SFP+TT+13+13
OP+SFP+TT+27+29
OP+SFP+TT+31+33
OP+SFP+TT+35+37
OP+SFP+TT+39+41
OP+SFP+TT+43+45
OP+SFP+TT+47+49
OP+SFP+TT+51+53
OP+SFP+TT+55+57
OP+SFP+TT+59+61
NO SFP
RW
0 (Default)
1
2
3
Output Parameters
Output Parameters are accessed by clicking the Output option below the Module in the parameter menu list.
Output parameters are grouped into a Table and can be accessed by clicking the Show Table button.
The following parameters are displayed:
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 97
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Table 46: Output Modules - Output Parameters
Name
Enforced Slew Rate
Mute
Laser Enable
(Modules with SFPs only)
Description
Sets output slew rate in bypass mode
Mutes individual board outputs
Enables or disables fiber optical output
Type Options
RW
SD (Default)
HD
RW
Yes
No (Default)
RW
Auto
Enable
Disable
RO
Wavelength
(Modules with SFPs only)
Reports wavelength of fiber optical output
Laser Status
Modules with SFPs only)
Reclocker Mode
Data Rate
Autobypass
Reports laser status
Sets the reclock mode to automatic or bypass or to one of three manual fixed rates
RO
Enabled
Disabled
N/A
Normal
Failed
RW
Auto (Default)
3G
HD
SD
Bypass
Detects data rate RO
Unknown
SD
HD
3G
RW
Yes (Default)
No
Sets automatic reclocker bypass mode.
When set to Yes, if incoming video is not locked in the reclocker, the signal will be passed through as is.
When set to No, if incoming video is not locked in the reclocker, signal output from the reclocker will be invalid.
Lock Detect Reports if data is relocked by reclocking stage
RO
Yes
No
Output Modules (PX-OB)
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 98
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Name
Exp Reclocker Mode
(Expansion Modules
only)
Expand Signal Present
(Expansion Modules
only)
Description Type Options
Sets the reclock mode RW
Auto (Default)
3G
HD
SD
Bypass
Reports signal presence RO
Yes
No
Exp Auto Bypass
(Expansion Modules
only)
Exp Lock Detect
(Expansion Modules
only)
Sets automatic reclocker bypass mode
RW
Yes
No
Reports if data is relocked by reclocking stage
RO
Yes
No
Exp Data Rate
(Expansion Modules
only)
Detects data rate RO
Unknown
SD
HD
3G
Output Modules (PX-OB)
Advanced Parameters
Advanced Parameters are accessed by clicking the Advanced menu option in the parameter menu list.
Table 47: Output Modules - Advanced Parameters
Name Description Type Options
Parameter Hysteresis Sets hysteresis for parameters needing it.
This parameter works as time constant of low pass filter of status reporting, to ease CCS communication in case there is a flickering status report. It can be changed as required.
RW 0 - 10000000 (2000000)
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 99
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Specifications
Technical Specifications
Table 48: Output Module - Technical Specifications
Item
Output Connector
Impedance
Rise Time
Fall Time
Jitter
Optical Output Power
Optical Output Extinction
Ratio
Description
75 Ohm BNC per IEC 169-8
75 Ohm HD-BNC
LC optical
DensiShield
75 Ohms (BNC, HD-BNC)
100 Ohms differential (DensiShield)
Signal type
SMPTE 424M, SMPTE 292M, SMPTE 259M,
SMPTE 344M, DVB-ASI
Most other < 1Vpp digital signals, 3Mb/s to
3.0Gb/s
Return loss (BNC, HD-BNC)
> 15dB, up to 1.485GHz
> 10dB, 1.485GHz to 2.97GHz
Amplitude
800mV +/- 10%
Overshoot
DC Offset
<10%
0V +/- 0.5V
270Mb/s: 400-800pS
1.485Gb/s: < 135pS
2.97Gb/s: < 135pS
270Mb/s: 400-800pS
1.485Gb/s: < 135pS
2.97Gb/s: < 135pS
270Mb/s, 1.485Gb/s: <0.2UI reclocked
2.97Gb/s: <0.3UI reclocked
-2 dBm (based on OP+SFP+TT+13+13)
7 dB (based on OP+SFP+TT+13+13)
Output Modules (PX-OB)
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 100
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Capacity
Table 49: PX-OB Output Module Capacity
Number of Inputs
From rear edge of module 8 (optional DensiShield inputs)
From MI connector 32 (16 main + 16 redundant)
Number of Outputs
To rear edge of module 16 (16 single ended or 16 differential or 8 single ended + 8 differential)
Output Modules (PX-OB)
Control Requirements
All settings for the output circuitry are reset to the Output slot’s configuration on module insertion.
Settings follow module location, not modules themselves. This way, modules can be moved from slot to slot without the need to reconfigure the parameters.
Applications Integration
The CCS Control System supports each Output module via the Navigator architecture with the router module installed, and is available for control and monitoring from any Imagine Communications- or
SNMP-supported control application.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 101
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Digital Video Modules
Digital Video Modules
Digital Video Modules Overview
The following Digital Video Input and Output Modules for the IP3 Frame are covered in this chapter:
Digital Video Back Module Options
Module Description Use With
DIGITAL VIDEO INPUT MODULES
PX-HSR9C-IBG Input Module (on page
9 Channel Electrical Back Module with 9 HDBNC connectors.
PX-HSR9O-IBG Input Module (on page
9 Channel Optical Back Module with 5 SFP connectors.
PX-HSR9C1D-IBG Input Module (on
9 Channel Electrical Back Module with 9 HDBNC connectors and 1
Densishield port for expansion.
PX-HSR9O1D-IBG Input Module (on
9 Channel Optical Back Module with 5 SFP connectors and 1
Densishield port for expansion.
PX-IB Input Module
See Input Modules (PX-
DIGITAL VIDEO OUTPUT MODULES
PX-HSR16C-OBG Output Module (on
PX-HSR16O-OBG Output Module (on
PX-HSR8O2DS-OBG Output Module
PX-HSR8C2DS-OBG Output Module
16 Channel Electrical Back Module with 16 HDBNC connectors.
16 Channel Optical Back Module with 8 SFP connectors.
PX-OB Output Module
See Output Modules
16 Channel Optical Back Module with 4 SFP connectors and 2
DensiShield ports for Expansion.
16 Channel Electrical Back Module with 8 HDBNC connectors and 2
DensiShield ports for Expansion.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 102
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
PX-HSR9C-IBG Input Module
Digital Video Modules
The PX-HSR9C-IBG is a 9 channel SD/HD/3G Digital Video Input Module with 9 HDBNC connectors.
IN 1 IN 2 IN 3 IN 4 IN 5
IN 6 IN 7 IN 8
Figure 42: PX-HSR9C-IBG Back Module
This Back Module interfaces with the PX-IB Input module to accept 9 electrical inputs.
See Input Modules (PX-IB) (on page 80) for details on the PX-IB Input module.
IN 9
Power Consumption
Table 50: PX-HSR9C-IBG Power Consumption
24V Power Rail 10.7W
5V Power Rail
Total Power
0.43W
11.13W
PX-HSR9O-IBG Input Module
The PX-HSR9O-IBG is a 9 channel SD/HD/3G Digital Video Input Module with 5 SFP connectors.
The PX-HSR9O-IBG has 5 dual channel SFP modules mounted on the metal back panel of the back module, each containing two channels. The second channel of the last connector is not currently used.The OP+SFP+RR and OP+SFP+R accept fiber optical signals within wavelength range of 1260nm ~
1620nm.
Figure 43: PX-HSR9O-IBG
The Back Module interfaces with the PX-IB Input module to accept 9 optical inputs.
See Input Modules (PX-IB) (on page 80) for details on the PX-IB Input module.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 103
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Power Consumption
Table 51: PX-HSR9O-IBG Power Consumption
24V Power Rail 14W
5V Power Rail
Total Power
0.43W
14.43W
Digital Video Modules
PX-HSR9C-IBG/PX-HSR9O-IBG Parametric Control
The PX-HSR9C-IBG/PX-HSR9O-IBG Module can be controlled via the Controller. When you access a PX-
HSR9C-IBG/PX-HSR9O-IBG module (by clicking on it in the list of Input Modules), its parameters are displayed. The total number of PX-HSR9C-IBG/9O modules in the frame is also displayed on the left
PX-HSR9C1D-IBG Input Module
The PX-HSR9C1D-IBG is a 9 channel SD/HD/3G Digital Video Input Module with 9 HDBNC connectors and one DensiShield port for expansion.
DensiShield
OUT 9 OUT 1-8 IN 1 IN 2
IN 3 IN 4 IN 5 IN 6
IN 7 IN 8 IN 9
Figure 44: PX-HSR9C1D-IBG
Via the DensiShield port, inputs received can be routed to another module in the same frame or another frame.
This Back Module interfaces with the PX-IB Input module to accept 9 electrical inputs.
See Input Modules (PX-IB) (on page 80) for details on the PX-IB Input module.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 104
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Power Consumption
Table 52: PX-HSR9C1D-IBG Power Consumption
24V Power Rail 13W
5V Power Rail 0.43W
Total Power 13.43W
Digital Video Modules
PX-HSR9O1D-IBG Input Module
The PX-HSR9O1D-IBG is a 9 channel SD/HD/3G Digital Video Input Module with 5 SFP connectors.
Figure 45: PX-HSR9O1D-IBG
The PX-HSR9O-IBG has 5 dual channel SFP modules mounted on the metal back panel of the back module, each containing two channels. The first channel of the last connector is not currently used. The receivers accept fiber optical signals within wavelength range of X nm ~ X nm.
Via the DensiShield port, inputs received can be output/routed to another module in the same frame or another frame.
The Back Module interfaces with the PX-IB Input module to accept 9 optical inputs.
See Input Modules (PX-IB) (on page 80) for details on the PX-IB Input module.
Power Consumption
Table 53: PX-HSR9O1D-IBG Power Consumption
24V Power Rail 16.3W
5V Power Rail
Total Power
0.43W
16.73W
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 105
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
PX-HSR16C-OBG Output Module
Digital Video Modules
The PX-HSR16C-OBG is a 16 channel SD/HD/3G Digital Video Output Module with 16 HDBNC connectors.
OUT 3 OUT 5 OUT 7
OUT 9
OUT 11 OUT 13
OUT 15
OUT 1
OUT 2
OUT 4
Figure 46: PX-HSR16C-OBG
OUT 6 OUT 8
OUT 10
OUT 12 OUT 14
OUT 16
This Back Module interfaces with the PX-OB Output module to output16 electrical outputs.
See Output Modules (PX-OB) (see "Input Modules (PX-IB)" on page 80) for details on the PX-OB Output
module.
Power Consumption
Table 54: PX-HSR16C-OBG Power Consumption
24V Power Rail 11.7W
5V Power Rail
Total Power
0.43W
12.13W
PX-HSR16O-OBG Output Module
The PX-HSR16O-OBG is a 16 channel SD/HD/3G Digital Video Output Module with 8 SFP connectors.
OUT 1
OUT 2 OUT 3 OUT 4
OUT 5 OUT 6 OUT 7 OUT 8 OUT 9 OUT 10
OUT 11 OUT 12
OUT 13 OUT 14 OUT 15 OUT 16
Figure 47: PX-HSR16O-OBG
The PX-HSR16O-OBG has 8 SFP modules mounted on the metal back panel of the back module, each containing two channels.
The PX-HSR16O-OBG interfaces with the PX-OB Output module to output up to 16 optical outputs. See
Output Modules (PX-OB) (see "Input Modules (PX-IB)" on page 80) for details on the PX-OB Output
module.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 106
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Power Consumption
Table 55: PX-HSR16O-OBG Power Consumption
24V Power Rail 21.9W
5V Power Rail
Total Power
0.43W
22.33W
Digital Video Modules
PX-HSR16C-OBG/PX-HSR16O-OBG-IBG Parametric Control
The PX-HSR16C-OBG/PX-HSR16O-OBG Module can be controlled via the Controller. When you access a
PX-HSR16C-OBG/PX-HSR16O-OBG module (by clicking on it in the list of Output Modules), its parameters are displayed. The total number of PX-HSR16C-OBG/PX-HSR16O-OBG modules in the frame is also displayed on the left.
PX-HSR8O2DS-OBG Output Module
The PX-HSR8O2DS-OBG is a 16 channel SD/HD/3G Digital Video Output Module.
OUT 1/2 OUT 3/4 OUT 5/6
OUT 7/8
DensiShield
DensiShield
IN 1-8 OUT 9-16
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 107
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Figure 48: PX-HSR8O2DS-OBG
Digital Video Modules
Figure 49: PX-HSR8O2DS-OBG
The PX-HSR8O2DS-OBG has 4 SFP connectors mounted on the metal back panel of the back module, each containing 2 channels.
There are 2 DensiShield ports on the module - one of them accepts up to 8 electrical inputs and the other can output op to 8 electrical outputs. The DensiShield ports are intended for expansion.
The PX-HSR8O2DS-OBG interfaces with the PX-OB Output Module to output up to 16 outputs (8 optical
and 8 optical/electrical). See Output Modules (PX-OB) (see "Input Modules (PX-IB)" on page 80) for
details on the PX-OB Output module.
Power Consumption
Table 56: PX-HSR8O2DS-OBG Power Consumption
24V Power Rail 18W
5V Power Rail
Total Power
0.43W
18.43W
PX-HSR8C2DS-OBG Output Module
The PX-HSR8C2DS-OBG is a 16 channel SD/HD/3G Digital Video Output Module.
OUT 1
OUT 2 OUT 3 OUT 4 OUT 5 OUT 6
OUT 7 OUT 8
Figure 50: PX-HSR8C2DS-OBG
DensiShield
DensiShield
IN 1-8 OUT 9-16
Figure 51: PX-HSR8C2DS-OBG
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 108
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Digital Video Modules
The PX-HSR8C2DS-OBG has 8 HD-BNC connectors mounted on the metal back panel of the back module.
There are 2 DensiShield ports on the module - one of them accepts up to 8 electrical inputs and the other can output up to 8 electrical outputs. The DensiShield ports are intended for expansion.
The PX-HSR8C2DS-OBG interfaces with the PX-OB Output Module to output up to 16 outputs. See
Output Modules (PX-OB) (see "Input Modules (PX-IB)" on page 80) for details on the PX-OB Output
module.
PX-HSR8C2DS-OBG/PX-HSR8O2DS-OBG Parametric Control
The PX-HSR8C2DS-OBG/PX-HSR8O2DS-OBG Module can be controlled via the Controller. When you access a PX-HSR9C-IBG/PX-HSR9O-IBG module (by clicking on it in the list of Output Modules), its parameters are displayed. The total number of PX-HSR8C2DS-OBG/PX-HSR8O2DS-OBG modules in the frame is also displayed on the left.
Power Consumption
Table 57: PX-HSR8C2DS-OBG Power Consumption
24V Power Rail 14.1W
5V Power Rail
Total Power
0.43W
14.53W
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 109
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer/Demultiplexer Modules
Frame Synchronizer and
Multiplexer/Demultiplexer Modules
Overview
The following Frame Synchronizer Demux Input Modules are available:
Table 58: Frame Synchronizer Demux Input Modules
Module Description
PT-FSDMX-IBG 8 Channel Frame Synchronizer and Demux Input Module with BNC connectors.
See PT-FSDMX-IBG/PT-FSDMXO-IBG Frame Synchronizer and Demultiplexing
PT-FSDMXO-IBG 8 Channel Frame Synchronizer and Demux Input Module with SFP connectors
See PT-FSDMX-IBG/PT-FSDMXO-IBG Frame Synchronizer and Demultiplexing
PT-FSDX8C1D-IBG 8 Channel Matrix Expansion Frame Sync Input Module
See PT-FSDX8C1D-IBG Frame Sync Input Module with Matrix Expansion (on page
The following Frame Synchronizer Mux Output Modules are available:
Table 59: Frame Synchronizer Mux Output Modules
Module Description
PT-HSRMX8X-OBG 8 Channel Frame Synchronizer and Mux Output Module with BNC/Optical connectors.
See PT-HSRMX8C/PT-HSRMX8O-OBG Frame Synchronizer and Mux Output
Module
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 110
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer/Demultiplexer Modules
PT-FSDMX-IBG/PT-FSDMXO-IBG Frame
Synchronizer and Demultiplexing Input
Modules
The PT-FSDMX-IBG and PT-FSMDXO-IBG 8 Channel Frame Synchronizer and Demux Input Boards add
Video and Audio processing to input boards in the IP3 Frame.
The PT-FSDMX-IBG back module provides BNC connectors.
The PT-FSDMXO-IBG back module provides optical inputs through SFP fiber optical receiver modules.
Each SDI path is processed independently, and supports SD, 1.5Gb/s HD, 3Gb/s HD and Dual Link formats. The De-embedded, sample rate converted and processed audio data of all 8 SDI channels is provided to the audio crosspoint for distribution. Both modules consume up to 50 watts each, depending on operating conditions.
Key Features
Key processing features for each channel are:
Video ProcAmp: gain, hue, black/white clip
SMPTE 352M video payload detection and insertion
EDH (SD) and CRC (HD) detection and insertion
Simple test signal generator
Audio De-embedder: 4 groups, 4 mono channels per group
Audio Sample Rate Conversion (SRC) after de-embedding
Audio delay
Audio test tone generator
Audio ProcAmp: gain, mute, invert, sum, and swap
Frame Sync Features
In addition, modules with the Frame Sync license have these features:
Video frame synchronizer and delay
Audio embedder with append or overwrite mode
Audio synchronizer
Modules with the Frame Sync license installed operate in the following modes:
Framesync mode—SDI channels are genlocked to a common reference source, which can be either
NTSC, PAL or TriLevel. Your video reference has to be the same frame rate as your input. The input channels can be asynchronous to each other.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 111
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer/Demultiplexer Modules
Delay mode—SDI channels will be processed in their recovered input clock domain. In Delay mode, some restrictions apply to the processing of Audio data.
Mixed operation—Some channels run in Framesync mode while others run in Delay mode.
Figure 52: PT-FSDMX-IBG Module
Figure 53: PT-FSDMXO-IBG Module
Power-Up sequence
Due to the complexity of the board and its parameter list, it takes about 2.5 minutes after power-cycling a board before it is fully operational.
About 30 seconds after power-cycling, a board is ready to detect input signals, but it outputs a 75% color bar test pattern of the same video standard as the detected input signal until the PT-Resource card has completed uploading the previously used configuration (parameters).
The readiness of the board is reflected by the read-only Control Status parameter. See Table General ->
Control Status for details.
Firmware Upgrade and Backup Image
The PT-FSDMX-IBG/PT-FSDMXO-IBG modules maintain a backup image of the last working firmware at all times. In the event of an upgrade failure, the module will revert back to its backup image to maintain operation on the board. You can verify the version that is current running on the module by looking at the version parameters: Software Version, Control FPGA Version and Processing FPGA Version.
Upgrading the firmware on PT-FSDMX-IBG and PT-FSDMXO-IBG modules takes approximately 50 minutes. Multiple (identical) boards can be upgraded at once in batches of up to 16 boards (= one
'zone'). A 'batch' upgrade takes about as long as upgrading a single board.
Always wait for the 'Firmware upgrade successful' message before power-cycling the system, exchanging boards, or carrying out any other maintenance work that could interfere with the upgrade
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 112
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer/Demultiplexer Modules process. Do not interrupt the power supply or tamper with a board while an upgrade is in progress. This could corrupt the firmware, necessitating a restart of the upgrade process.
Note: If the Software Version shows 0.00, this indicates that the PT-FSDMX-IBG is in failsafe mode. In this mode, the board will only support upgrade operations and basic control with the Platinum Resource module. You can perform software upgrades as usual while the module is in failsafe mode, but after the upgrade is completed, the module will need to be hot-swapped in order to have the new firmware take effect.
Activating PT-FSDMX Functions
The following topics are described in this section:
Audio Order of Operations on page 4 (see "Audio Order of Operations" on page 113 )
Operating with the Frame Sync on page 5 (see "Operating with the Frame Sync" on page 113)
Fast Video Switch on page 5 (see "Fast Video Switch" on page 114)
Audio Test Tones on page 5 (see "Audio Test Tones" on page 114)
Group (1-4) Deembedding Control on page 5 (see "Group (1-4) Deembedding Control" on page 114)
Audio Embedding Modes on page 5 (see "Audio Embedding Modes" on page 114)
Video Frame Synchronization on page 6 (see "Video Frame Synchronization" on page 114)
Audio Synchronization on page 7 (see "Audio Synchronization" on page 115)
Audio Order of Operations
Insert Tone (if enabled)
1. Polarity Reversal and Level Adjust
2. Sum
3. Swap/Copy
4. Mute (if enabled)
Operating with the Frame Sync
The frame sync is a licensable option. If you do not have the Frame Sync license, this feature will not be available. To acquire a Frame Sync license, contact your Customer Service representative. A license can be added for the module using the License Key parameter.
When operating the Frame Sync in Delay mode, the audio embedders are automatically turned off. Any ancillary data will be passed unprocessed (aside from any video delay).
If the input video frame rate does not match the genlock frame rate for a channel, that channel is automatically placed into Delay Mode. This information is reflected in the Frame Sync Status parameter.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 113
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Fast Video Switch
Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer/Demultiplexer Modules
When input video is switched between two sources while both sources are within vertical blanking, use the Fast Switch parameter to enable fast video switching between the sources. In this mode, output video is not frozen when both sources are within the vertical blanking area when the switch takes place.
Audio Test Tones
The following table describes the frequency and levels of each audio output test tone, available as a selection from each of the Output Ch (1–16) Source Select parameters:
Table 60: Audio Test Tones
Test Tone Frequency
Test Tone 1
Test Tone 2
400 Hz
1 kHz
Test Tone 3
Test Tone 4
2 kHz
4 kHz
Group (1-4) Deembedding Control
The following table describes options for the Group (1–4) Deembedding Control parameter.
Table 61: Deembedding Control Options
Item Description
Repeat
Mute
Upon detection of a de-embedding error, the deembedder repeats the last good AES sample.
Upon detection of a de-embedding error, the deembedder mutes the current outgoing AES sample.
Audio Embedding Modes
See Appendix A, Audio Embedding.
Video Frame Synchronization
The frame synchronizer offers two modes of operation: Delay mode and Synchronizer (Sync) mode.
These modes can be chosen using the Frame Sync Mode parameter.
In Delay mode, the output video is synchronized to the input video.
In Sync mode, the output video is synchronized to the reference video. The reference standard you can use depends on the output video standard you have set, as outlined in Table .
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 114
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer/Demultiplexer Modules
Table 62: Supported Reference and Output Video Standard Combinations in Sync Mode
Reference
Standard
525i 59.94
625i 50
720p 60
720p 59.94
720p 50
Output Video Standard
1080i 59.94
1080p 59.94
1080p 29.97
720p 59.94
525i 59.94
1080p 59.94 DL
1080i 50
1080p 50
1080p 25
720p 50
625i 50
1080p 50 DL
720p 60
1080p 60
1080p 60 DL
720p 59.94
1080p 59.94
1080p 59.94 DL
720p 50
1080p 50
1080p 50 DL
Reference
Standard
1080i 60
1080p 30
1080i 59.94
1080p 29.97
1080i 50
1080p 25
1080p 24
1080sF 24
1080p 23.98
1080sF 23.98
Output Video Standard
1080i 60
1080p 60
1080p 30
720p 60
1080p 60 DL
1080p 59.94
720p 59.94
1080i 50
1080p 50
1080p 25
720p 50
1080p 50 DL
1080p 24
1080sF 24
1080i 59.94
1080p 29.97
525i 59.94
1080p 59.94 DL
625i 50
1080p 23.98
1080sF 23.98
In both Sync mode and Delay mode, PT-FSDMX provides several controls to manipulate the output video signal:
Horizontal timing
Vertical timing
Adjustable frame delay
Manually freeze output video on first or second field (interlaced standards), or on the whole frame (all standards)
Audio Synchronization
By default, PT-FSDMX-IBG and PT-FSDMXO-IBG synchronize de-embedded audio with timing information from the video frame synchronizer prior to re-embedding the audio.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 115
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer/Demultiplexer Modules
When Pair Delay Track is set to sync tracking, the audio will be automatically delayed to match the video delay. Additionally, up to three seconds of delay can be added through the Audio Channel Delay parameter.
PT-FSDMX-IBG Controllable Parameters
The PT-FSDMX-IBG Module can be controlled via the Controller. When you access a PT-FSDMX-IBG module (by clicking on it in the list of modules), its parameters are displayed. The total number of PT-
FSDMX-IBG modules in the frame is also displayed on the left.
The following are user-controllable parameters for PT-FSDMX-IBG/PT-FSDMXO-IBG.
General Parameters (on page 116 )
Genlock Parameters (on page 118)
Input Parameters (on page 119)
Processing Parameters (on page 121)
General Parameters
Table 63: PT-FSDMX-IBG - General Parameters
Name Description
Serial Number
License Key
Licensed Options
Displays the module’s unique identifier
Activates the Frame
Sync option
Displays activated options
Type Options
RO <String>
RW <String>
RO
None
Frame Sync
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 116
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Name Description
Temperature (x 2)
(TABLE PARAMETER)
Fan Status
(TABLE PARAMETER)
Indicates the temperature of the
FPGA
Indicates proper functioning of the module’s fan unit
FPGA (x 2) DDR Memory
Status (x 2)
(TABLE PARAMETER)
Indicates proper functioning of the DDR memory
Parameter Update Rate Defines the rate at which parameters are updated
Control Status [RO]
Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer/Demultiplexer Modules
Type Options
RO <String> in Degrees
RO
RO
RW
Celsius
Bad
Good
Bad
Good
Slow
Medium
Fast
RO
Please Wait
Ready to Set
Figure 54: PT-FSDMX-IBG - General Parameters
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 117
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Genlock Parameters
Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer/Demultiplexer Modules
Table 64: PT-FSDMX-IBG - Genlock Parameters
Name
Sync Select
Description
Selects which physical sync port the module uses as a reference
Genlock Video Present Reports the presence of the reference video signal
Genlock Video Locked Reports the locked status of the reference video signal
Genlock Standard Indicates the video standard detected on the genlock input
Type Options
RW
1
2
3
4
RO
No
Yes
RO
No
Yes
RO
Unknown
525i 59.94
625i 50
720p 25
720p 29.97
720p 30
720p 50
720p 59.94
720p 60
1080p 23.98
1080p 24
1080p 29.97
1080p 30
1080p 25
1080i 50
1080i 59.94
1080i 60
1080sF 23.98
1080sF 24
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 118
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer/Demultiplexer Modules
Figure 55: Genlock Parameters
Input Parameters
Table 65: PT-FSDMX-IBG - Input Parameters
Name Description Type Options
VIDEO
SDI Video Standard (x 8) Displays the SDI video signal standard
RO
Unknown
525i 59.94
625i 50
720p 25
720p 29.97
720p 30
720p 50
720p 59.94
720p 60
1080p 23.98
1080p 24
1080p 29.97
1080p 30
1080p 25
1080i 50
1080i 59.94
1080i 60
1080p 50
1080p 59.94
1080p 60
1080p 50 DL
1080p 59.94 DL
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 119
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Name Description
Signal Presence (x 8)
EDH Present (x 8)
CRC/EDH Error Counter
(x 8)
CRC/EDH Error Clear (x
8)
Input Optical Power
(Optical modules only)
SFP Type
(Optical modules only)
Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer/Demultiplexer Modules
Type Options
1080p 60 DL
1080sF 23.98
1080sF 24
RO
No
Yes
Reports the presence of the SDI input video signal
Reports the presence of
EDH in the input SDI signal
RO
No
Yes
Reports the number of chrominance CRC/EDH errors that have occurred
RO 0 to 65535
Clears all CRC/EDH error counters
Reports input optical signal power level
Shows the type of optical receiver installed
RW
No
Yes
RO
Too Low
-32 - 1 dBm
Too High
RO
Unknown
N/A
(G)Dual-Rx PIN
EMBEDDED AUDIO STATUS
Group Presence (8 x 4)
(TABLE PARAMETER)
Group Active Channels
(8 x 4)
(TABLE PARAMETER)
Reports the presence of the specified audio group in the SDI signal
RO
No
Yes
Indicates which channels are active
RO
None
CH1
CH2
CH12
CH3
CH13
CH23
CH123
CH4
CH14
CH24
CH124
CH34
CH134
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 120
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Name Description
Group Sampling Rate (8 x 4)
(TABLE PARAMETER)
Audio Format (8 x 16)
(TABLE PARAMETER)
Reports the sampling rate from the control
Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer/Demultiplexer Modules packet of the specified audio group
Reports the AES format
(PCM/non-PCM) of specified output embedded audio channel
Type Options
CH234
CH1234
RO
48.0 kHz
44.1 kHz
32.0 kHz
N/A
FreeRun
RO
PCM
Non-PCM
Figure 56: PT-FSDMX-IBG - Input Parameters
Processing Parameters
Table 66: PT-FSDMX-IBG - Processing Parameters
Name Description Type Options
VIDEO
TSG Enable (x 8) Enables and disables the RW
No
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 121
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Name
(TABLE PARAMETER)
Description
test signal generator
TSG Pattern (x 8)
(TABLE PARAMETER)
TSG Standard (x 8)
(TABLE PARAMETER)
Selects the test pattern for the test signal generator
Selects the video standard for the TSG
(default is to follow the detected standard)
Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer/Demultiplexer Modules
Type Options
Yes
RW
Bar 75
Bar 100
Eq. Test
PLL Test
RW
Follow RX
525i 59.94
625i 50
720p 25
720p 29.97
720p 30
720p 50
720p 59.94
720p 60
1080p 23.98
1080p 24
1080p 29.97
1080p 30
1080p 25
1080i 50
1080i 59.94
1080i 60
1080p 50
1080p 59.94
1080p 60
1080p 50 DL
1080p 59.94 DL
1080p 60 DL
1080sF 23.98
1080sF 24
EMBEDDING
Dolby E Start Line
ADS Clean
Group Embedding Mode
(8 x 4)
Selects the embedding mode for the specified audio group
RW
Off
Append
Overwrite
Auto
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 122
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Name Description
Dolby E Auto Align
Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer/Demultiplexer Modules
Type Options
Yes
No
AUDIO
Fade Rate (x 8)
Word Length (x8)
V-Bit Mute Enable
Sample Rate Conversion
(8 x 8)
(TABLE PARAMETER)
Tones (8 x 16)
(TABLE PARAMETER)
Specifies the fade rate RW 0 - 10 (10) s, in 1second steps
Specifies the audio word length for all audio channels within the SDI stream
RW
16 bits
20 bits
24 bits
RW
No
Yes
Enables automatic muting of audio outputs when the V-bit is set
Muting on a detected V-
Bit applies to PCM audio channels only. Non-PCM audio channels will not be muted.
Engages or disengages the sample rate converter
Selects the tone level for the specified audio channel
RW
Auto
Enable
Bypass
RW
Off
400 Hz
1 KHz
2 KHz
4 KHz
Level Adjust (8 x 16)
(TABLE PARAMETER)
Summing (8 x 8)
(TABLE PARAMETER)
Adjusts the audio level
(gain) for each audio channel
Specifies whether to sum the audio within a pair
Left to Right - the summed audio is placed in the right channel
RW
-18 dB - 18 dB (0) in
0.1 dB steps
Polarity Reversal (8 x 16)
(TABLE PARAMETER)
Specifies whether the audio channel should be inverted
Audio Mute (8 x 16)
(TABLE PARAMETER)
RW
No
Yes
Enables muting for the specified output channel
RW
Off
On
RW
None
Right to left
Left to right
Both
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 123
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Name
Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer/Demultiplexer Modules
Description
Right to Left - the summed audio is placed in the left channel
Both - the summed audio is placed in both left and right channels
Type Options
Swap/Copy (8 x 8)
(TABLE PARAMETER)
Specifies whether to swap or copy the audio within a pair; able to swap left and right channels, copy left channel to the right channel, and copy the right channel to the left
RW
No Swap
Swap
Right to left
Left to right
DEEMBEDDING > AUDIO SYNC
Audio Channel Pair
Delay Track (8 x 8)
†
Selects the audio tracking type
Audio Channel Delay (8 x
16)
Selects the amount of delay applied to the audio channel
RW
RW
No Tracking
Synch Tracking
0 - 3000 ms in 1 ms steps
DEEMBEDDING > PROC AMP
Y Gain (x 8)
Cb Gain (x 8)
Adjusts gain for the Y channel
Adjusts gain to the Cb color difference component
RW
RW
-3.0 to +3.0 dB (0 dB) in 0.1 dB steps
-3.0 to +3.0 dB (0 dB) in 0.1 dB steps
Cr Gain (x 8)
Y Offset (x 8)
Cb Offset (x 8)
Adjusts gain to the Cr color difference component
Adjusts offset for the Y channel
Adjusts offset for the Cb channel
RW -3.0 to +3.0 dB (0 dB) in 0.1 dB steps
RW ±100.6 mV (0 mV) in
0.8 mV increments
RW ±100.6 mV (0 mV) in
0.8 mV increments
Cr Offset (x 8) Adjusts offset for the Cr channel
White Clip Enable (x 8) Controls level clipping according to the White
Clip Level control
White Clip Level (x 8)
RW
RW
±100.6 mV (0 mV) in
0.8 mV increments
Disable
Enable
Sets the white clip level RW 636.9 to 763.1 mV
(700 mV) in 0.8 mV
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 124
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer/Demultiplexer Modules
Name Description
Black Clip Enable (x 8) Controls level clipping according to the Black
Clip Level control
Black Clip Level (x 8)
Hue (x 8)
Type Options
increments
RW
Disable
Enable
Sets the black clip level RW -47.9 to +47.9 mV (0.0
mV) in 0.8 mV increments
RW -180 to +180° (0°) Adjusts the hue of the incoming digital video signal
DEEMBEDDING > FRAME SYNC
†
Frame Sync Mode (x 8)
†
Sets the operational mode of the frame sync, delay or sync. Available with the optional Frame
Sync license.
Frame Sync Status (x 8)
†
Indicates whether the frame sync is locked, and what it is locked to
Fast Switch (x 8)
†
Force Freeze (x 8)
†
Force Freeze Mode (x 8)
Loss of Video Mode
†
Horizontal Phase (x 8)
†
Enable fast switching
Enables video freeze
Specifies the type of freeze, field 1, field 2 or frame
Selects the output video mode when the input video is disrupted
Adjusts the horizontal timing
Note:The usable range depends on the video standard.
RW
Delay mode
Sync mode
RW
Sync Ext Lock
Sync Local Lock
Delay Mode
Delay Mismatch
RW
No
Yes
RW
No
Yes
RW
Field 1 (1080i/525i
59.94/625i
50/1080sF)
Field 2
Frame (1080p/720p)
RW
Pass
Black
Freeze
RW
0.000 us to 29.616 us (1080p 30,
1035i 60)
0.000 us to 14.808 us (1080p 60,
1080p 60 DL)
0.000 us to 29.646 us (1080p 29,
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 125
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Name Description
Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer/Demultiplexer Modules
Vertical Phase (x 8)
†
Adjusts the vertical timing
Note:The usable range depends on the video standard.
Type Options
1080i 59)
0.000 us to 14.823 us (1080p 59,
1080p 59.94 DL)
0.000 us to 35.542 us (1080p 25,
1080i 50)
0.000 us to 17.771 us (1080p 50,
1080p 50 DL)
0.000 us to 37.024 us (1080p 24,
1080sF 24)
0.000 us to 37.061 us (1080p 23.98,
1080sF 23.98)
0.000 us to 31.987 us (1080i 50_295)
0.000 us to 22.209 us (720p 60)
0.000 us to 22.231 us (720p 59.94)
0.000 us to 26.653 us (720p 50)
0.000 us to 44.431 us (720p 30)
0.000 us to 44.475 us (720p 29)
0.000 us to 53.320 us (720p 25)
0.000 us to 63.518 us (525i 59.94)
0.000 us to 63.963 us (625i 50)
RW
0–1124 lines
(1080p/I/sF)
0–1249 lines
(1080i 50 SMPTE
295M)
0–749 lines (720p)
0–524 lines (525i
59.94)
0–624 lines (625i 50)
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 126
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Name
Frame Offset (x 8)
†
Description
Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer/Demultiplexer Modules
Determines the number of frames the video is offset
Type Options
RW 0 - 17 frames (Delay mode)
0 - 16 frames (Sync mode)
VERSION
Software Version Indicates software version
Control FPGA Version Indicates firmware version
Processing FPGA Version Indicates firmware version
RO
RO
RO
<String>
<String>
<String>
Functional Block Diagram
This diagram shows the video and audio data paths for a single channel through the module. This path is duplicated for each of the module’s eight channels.
Figure 57: PT-FSDMX-IBG/PT-FSDMXO-IBG Functional Block Diagram
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 127
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
LED Indicators
Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer/Demultiplexer Modules
Figure 58: PT-FSDMX Card-Edge LED Indicators
Table 67: PT-FSDMX-IBG/PT-FSDMXO-IBG Specific LEDs
LED Function
Channel Status
Ch (1 - 8)
FPGA Temp
FPGA Temp (A - B)
Red: Power on test failed
Red: Above temperature limit
PT-FSDMX-IBG Specifications
Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice.
Table 68: PT-FSDMX-IBG Specifications
Item Specification
Number of inputs
Connector
Impedance
8
BNC (IEC169-8)
75
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 128
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Item Specification
SD SDI (270Mb/s)
Format
Return loss
Equalization
SMPTE 259M
525i59.94, 625i50
Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer/Demultiplexer Modules
> 18 dB from 5 MHz to 270 MHz
Adaptive cable equalization for up to 984 ft (300m), typical, of Belden 8281 coaxial cable
HD-SDI (1.5Gb/s)
Format and image sample structure
Return loss
Equalization
HD-SDI (3Gb/s)
Format and image sample structure
Return loss
Equalization
SMPTE 292M
SMPTE274M (1080i, 1080sF, 1080p)
SMPTE296M (720p)
> 18 dB (typical) from 5 MHz to 1485 MHz
Adaptive cable equalization for up to 590 ft (180 m), typical, of Belden 1694A coaxial cable
SMPTE 424M
SMPTE 425M Level A
SMPTE 372M
> 15 dB (typical) from 5 MHz to 1485 MHz
> 10 dB (typical) from 1485 MHz to 2970
MHz
Adaptive cable equalization for up to 328 ft (100 m), typical, of Belden 1694A coaxial cable
Table 69: PT-FSDMXO-IBG Specifications
Item Specification
Number of inputs 8
Package 4x Dual Channel Receiver SFP Modules
Connector
Wavelengths
Receiver sensitivity
Supported video rates
Supported formats and sampling structures
LC with PC/UPC polish
1260nm – 1620nm
-23dBm (PIN Receiver)
270Mb/s, 1.5Gb/s, 3Gb/s
See Electrical Input Specification
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 129
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Power Consumption
Table 70: PT-FSDMX-IBG Power Consumption
24V Power Rail 50W
5V Power Rail
Total Power
0.15W
50.15W
Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer/Demultiplexer Modules
Table 71: PT-FSDMXO-IBG Power Consumption
24V Power Rail 52W
5V Power Rail
Total Power
0.15W
52.15W
PT-FSDX8C1D-IBG Frame Sync Input Module with Matrix Expansion
PT-FSDX8C1D-IBG Operation
The PT-FSDX8C1D-IBG is an 8 Channel Frame Synchronizer and Demux Input Module that provides
Video and Audio processing to input boards in the IP3 Frame. This Input module enables video matrix expansion. A high density interconnect cable routes the eight incoming signals to a second frame.
All functions and features of the PT-FSDX8C1D-IBG module are identical to the PT-FSDMX-IBG module, on which it is based. See PT-FSDMX-IBG/PT-FSDMXO-IBG Frame Synchronizer and Demultiplexing Input
WARNING
Ensure that you mate the front and back modules before plugging in the DensiShield cable. This protects your back module from any unintended alignment issues.
PT-FSDX8C1D-IBG Input Module
The PT-FSDX8C1D-IBG Input module provides 8 input SDI options via HD-BNC connectors. In addition, these 8 input SDI signals are re-clocked and output via a DensiShield connector.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 130
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Figure 59: PT-FSDX8C1D-IBG Back Module
Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer/Demultiplexer Modules
Figure 60: PT-FSDX8C1D-IBG Back Module
PT-FSDX8C1D-IBG - Distributing Outputs to 2 Frames
The following graphic depicts how the PT-FSDX8C1D-IBG and the PT-HSR1D-IBG can be used together to distribute the 8 possible SDI inputs to 2 frames, expanding the available outputs.
Using a DensiShield cable to connect the DensiShield output of Frame 1 to the DensiShield input of
Frame 2, the eight inputs from Frame 1 can be directly routed (through the DensiShield out of Frame 1) to the inputs in Frame 2.
Figure 61: Using the PT-FSDX8C1D-IBG and PT-HSR1D-IBG to distribute the outputs of one frame to the inputs of a second frame
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 131
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer/Demultiplexer Modules
PT-FSDX8C1D-IBG Parameters
The PT-FSDX8C1D-IBG Module can be controlled via the Controller. When you access a PT-FSDX8C1D-
IBG module (by clicking on it in the list of modules), its parameters are displayed. The total number of
PT-FSDX8C1D-IBG modules in the frame is also displayed on the left.
PT-FSDX8C1D-IBG Parameters are similar to PT-FSDMX-IBG/PT-FSDMXO-IBG, on which it is based. See
PT-FSDMX-IBG Controllable Parameters (on page 116).
PT-FSDX8C1D-IBG Specifications
Specifications are identical to PT-FSDMX-IBG Specifications (on page 128).
Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice.
Table 72: PT-FSDX8C1D-IBG Specifications
Item
Number of inputs
Specification
8
Connector
Impedance
Number of outputs
Connector
Impedance
BNC (IEC169-8)
75
1
DensiShield
100
differential
SD SDI (270Mb/s)
Format
Return loss
Equalization
See Equalization Information (on
SMPTE 259M
525i59.94, 625i50
> 18 dB from 5 MHz to 270 MHz
Adaptive cable equalization for up to 984 ft
(300m), typical, of Belden 8281 coaxial cable
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 132
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Item
HD-SDI (1.5Gb/s)
Format and image sample structure
Return loss
Equalization
HD-SDI (3Gb/s)
Format and image sample structure
Return loss
Equalization
Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer/Demultiplexer Modules
Specification
SMPTE 292M
SMPTE274M (1080i, 1080sF, 1080p)
SMPTE296M (720p)
> 18 dB (typical) from 5 MHz to 1485 MHz
Adaptive cable equalization for up to 590 ft (150 m), typical, of Belden 1694A co-axial cable
SMPTE 424M
SMPTE 425M Level A
SMPTE 372M
> 15 dB (typical) from 5 MHz to 1485 MHz
> 10 dB (typical) from 1485 MHz to 2970 MHz
Adaptive cable equalization for up to 328 ft (100 m), typical, of Belden 1694A co-axial cable
Equalization Information
The cable length is 300 meters, Belden 8281, but the following applies in addition:
Note: The PT-FSDX8C1D-IBG uses an extended 3G-reach equalization. When combined with Belden 8281 coaxial cable, a pathological pattern, and a non-SPMTE424 (6.1.7)-compliant signal with excessive output amplitude excursions, the source equalization may be reduced to between 200 and 300 m for
SD-SDI signal.
This condition typically only occurs with older SD-SDI equipment having a 1uF capacitor on the output.
All recent and multi-rate SD/HD/3G equipment is compliant with the standard (has at least a 4.7uF capacitor on the output), and can achieve 300 m with 8281 cable and pathological pattern.
Power Consumption
Table 73: PT-FSDX8C1D-IBG Power Consumption
24V Power Rail 52W
5V Power Rail
Total Power
0.15W
52.15W
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 133
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer/Demultiplexer Modules
PX-HSRMX-OBG Frame Sync and Mux Output
Module
PX-HSRMX-OBG Overview
The PX-HSRMX-OBG is a Frame Synchronizer and Audio Mux Output Module that adds unprecedented
Video and Audio processing power to output boards in the IP3 Frame. The PX-HSRMX-OBG Output
Frame Sync card has 8 processed outputs and 8 unprocessed outputs. Processed outputs refer to signals that pass through the Video/Audio Frame Synchronizer which provides audio muxing capabilities.
Unprocessed outputs refer to SDI streams that are reclocked in the serial domain but are otherwise untouched.
Each Module presents 16 physical ports. There are two versions of the output card each supporting either optical or coaxial connectivity. Each version of the card supports processing on eight outputs. The additional eight outputs are either used for system expansion beyond a single Platinum IP3 frame or as standard video outputs. Both versions of the module are configured via the IP3 Database Editor.
Video and Audio Frame Synchronizers are available for each of the 8 processed SDI channels in addition to Audio Mux functionality. Each SDI path is processed independently with support for SD, 1.5 Gb/s HD,
3 Gb/s HD, and 3 Gb/s Dual Link formats. ASI signals are reported and processing stages are automatically bypassed. Both full Framesync and Delay modes are available.
The PX-HSRMX-OBG module consumes up to 75 watts, depending on the specific module type and on operating conditions. Ensure that the IP3 frame system has a sufficient number of power supplies to meet the demand resulting from the actual number of modules installed.
PX-HSRMX-OBG Variants
The PX-HSRMX-OBG Output Frame Sync Module is available in 4 different variants.
Table 74: PX-HSRMX-OBG Variants
Module
PX-HSR8CMX8C-OBG
PX-HSR8OMX8O-OBG
Description
SD/HD/3G Mux Output Module w/ 16 HD BNC back panel
SD/HD/3G Mux Output Module w/ 16 Fiber/8 SFP back panel
PX-HSRMX8C2D-OBG SD/HD/3G Mux Output Module w/ 8 HD BNC + 2 DensiShield back panel
Outputs
16 HD BNC Outputs
8 processed, 8 unprocessed
16 Optical Outputs
8 processed, 8 unprocessed
8 HD BNC Outputs, all processed.
1 Densishield Output for System expansion, unprocessed
1 Densishield Input for System expansion
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 134
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Module Description
PX-HSRMX8O2D-OBG
Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer/Demultiplexer Modules
SD/HD/3G Mux Output Module w/ 8 Fiber/4 SFP + 2 DensiShield back panel
Outputs
8 Optical Outputs, all processed.
1 Densishield Output for Router Matrix expansion, unprocessed
1 Densishield Input for Router Matrix expansion
See Specifications (see "PX-HSRMX-OBG Specifications" on page 141) for individual specifications.
PX-HSRMX-OBG Operation Modes
There are different operation modes available, depending on whether or not you have a Frame Sync license.
MUX only mode (without Frame Sync license)
For proper audio muxing operation, each SDI channel destined for Audio MUX must be locked to the
Reference signal provided to the board. While SDI channels can be of different data rates (e.g. SD SDI,
HD, HD 3G), their field/frame-rates need to match those of the applied Reference.
In the Frame Sync / Mux Mode menu, the following modes of operation can be selected on a per SDI channel basis:
MUX: Auto Detect
Note: MUX: Auto Detect is the recommended operation mode for boards without a frame sync license.
This mode auto checks if SDI channels are locked to the Reference signal provided to the board.
Locked SDI channels
All supported Audio muxing operations are applicable
Frame Sync / Mux Status menu reports locked channels as Mux: Locked
CHANNEL STATUS LED associated with the SDI channel at the front card edge will be lit green
Unlocked SDI channels
No Audio muxing will be performed and the channel will bypass all processing stages on the board
Frame Sync / Mux Status menu reports unlocked channels as Bypass
CHANNEL STATUS LED at the front card edge associated with the SDI channel will be off
MUX: Always On
Note: For channels that are asynchronous to the Reference, re-embedded Audio will suffer disturbances.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 135
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer/Demultiplexer Modules
In this mode, SDI channels are processed (audio muxing operations are supported), regardless of whether the channel is locked to the Reference signal.
Locked SDI channels
Frame Sync / Mux Status menu reports locked channels as Mux: Locked
CHANNEL STATUS LED associated with the SDI channel at the front card edge will be lit green
Unlocked SDI channels:
Frame Sync / Mux Status menu reports unlocked channels as Mux: Unlocked
CHANNEL STATUS LED associated with the SDI channel at the front card edge will be lit Red
Bypass Mode
SDI channels bypass all processing stages
No Audio muxing takes place when operating a channel in Bypass mode
Frame Sync / Mux Status menu reports channels operating in Bypass mode as Bypass
Frame Sync Mode
Frame Sync is a licensable option. If you do not have the Frame Sync license, this feature will not be available. To acquire a Frame Sync license, contact your Customer Service representative. A license can be added for the module using the License Key parameter.
Frame Sync mode is required if the incoming SDI data is asynchronous to the reference signal applied to the board. With Frame Sync (PT-FSOB-OPT) installed, incoming SDI data does not need to have a common data rate to be processed (muxing audio back into SDI streams). A mix of SD, HD, 3G, 3G DL is supported for channels with the same frame rate. It is important to note that if the channel and the reference signal do not share a common frame rate, inputs are processed in Delay mode (no audio muxing).
In the Frame Sync / Mux Mode menu, the following operation modes can be selected (on a per SDI channel basis):
Frame Sync: Sync Mode
An SDI channel qualifies for Frame Sync: Sync Mode if its field or frame rate matches that of the
Reference signal provided to the board.
No Reference, Frame Sync: Sync Mode
If no Reference is present but the operation mode is set to Frame Sync: Sync Mode
The outgoing signal will be locked to a local and fixed 27MHz high precision Reference.
The Frame Sync / Mux Status menu will report channels set to Frame Sync: Sync Mode as
Frame Sync: Local Lock.
External Reference
When an external Reference signal is applied to the frame (e.g. 525 or 625 Black, HD tri-level Sync), and the proper Reference Input has been selected for the board, and the Reference is being detected as ‘Present’ and ‘Locked’, and the SDI channel’s field-or frame-rate matches the rate of the
Reference signal
Video- and embedded Audio-data will be processed and synchronized to the applied Reference.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 136
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer/Demultiplexer Modules
The Frame Sync / Mux Status menu will report channels set to Frame Sync: Sync Mode as
Frame Sync: Ext Lock.
Reference present and locked, different frame rate for SDI channel
When a Reference is present and locked, but the SDI channel’s field or frame rate doesn’t match the rate of the Reference signal
The channel will be automatically forced into Delay mode.
The Frame Sync / Mux Status menu will report channels set to Frame Sync: Sync Mode as
Frame Sync: Delay Rate Mismatch.
Frame Sync: Delay Mode
Note: In ‘Delay’ mode, only a restricted set of processing features can be applied to an SDI channel.
When operating the Frame Sync in Delay mode, the audio embedders are automatically turned off. Any ancillary data will be passed unprocessed (aside from any video delay).
If the input video frame rate does not match the genlock frame rate for a channel, that channel is automatically placed into Delay Mode. This information is reflected in the Frame Sync Status parameter.
An SDI channel can be forced into Delay mode operation by setting it to Frame Sync: Delay Mode.
Channels set to Frame Sync: Delay Mode will be reported as Frame Sync: Delay Forced by the
Frame Sync / Mux Status menu.
Bypass Mode
In Bypass mode, the SDI channel will bypass all processing stages.
No Framesync operation and no Audio muxing takes place when operating a channel in Bypass mode.
The Frame Sync / Mux Status menu reports channel forced to operate in Bypass mode as Bypass.
PX-HSRMX-OBG Features
Key processing features for each channel are:
Video Frame Synchronizer and Delay
User selectable Loss-of-Video modes: Black, Freeze, Pass, Mute
Video ProcAmp: Gain, Offset, Hue, Black/White Clip
SMPTE 352M Video Payload: Detection, Insertion
EDH (SD) and CRC (HD): Detection, Insertion
Automatic ASI detection and bypass
Audio De-Embedder: 4 groups, 4 mono channels per group
Audio Sample Rate Conversion (SRC) after de-embedding (PCM data only)
Audio Synchronizer and Delay (arbitrary Audio delay for PCM data only)
Audio Test Tone Generator
Audio ProcAmp: Gain, Mute, Invert, Sum, Swap
Audio Embedder with Append/Overwrite mode
Supports mix of embedded PCM and non-PCM (Dolby-E/D) data
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 137
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer/Demultiplexer Modules
Features based on Licensing
FS=Framesync Mode with Framesync License
DLY=Delay Mode with Framesync License
MUX=Mux-only Operation without Framesync License
Table 75: Features based on Licensing
Processing Feature
Video Framesync
H/V Phase Control
Video
FS
FS, DLY
Embedded Audio TDM Audio
Frame Offset
Freeze
Video ProcAmp
ASI Bypass
FS, DLY
FS, DLY
FS, DLY, MUX
FS, DLY, MUX
FS, DLY, MUX FS Audio Sync (Sample rate conversion)
Audio Delay FS, MUX FS, MUX
Audio ProcAmp FS, MUX FS, MUX
Dolby E Header Alignment FS, MUX
Framesync/Delay Mode requires a Framesync License.
Mux Mode is available on boards without the Framesync license installed.
In Mux Mode, SDI channels must be locked to the external reference for proper operation.
Audio Processing
The Platinum IP3 output module is equipped with an Audio TDM Receiver that supports a TDM data rate of 344 Mb/s and 128 channels of TDMed audio. The following audio functionality is supported per SDI channel
De-embedding 4 groups (16 mono channels) of Audio prior to the Frame/Audio Synchronizer
Sample Rate Conversion (with bypass capability on a per stereo-pair basis) - Embedded Audio and
TDM Audio
Audio Synchronizer - Embedded Audio and TDM Audio
Audio Delay (> 3000ms / mono channel)
Audio Proc (Gain, Mute, Invert)
Audio Sum (on a per mono-channel basis, but based on a predefined list of Sums)
Audio Swap (on a per mono-channel basis, but based on a predefined list of Swaps)
Audio Test Tone Generator (Off, 400Hz, 2kHz, 4kHz)
Dolby-E Header alignment (for Dolby-E data received via TDM only)
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 138
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer/Demultiplexer Modules
Embedding 4 groups (16 mono channels) of Audio after the Frame/Audio Synchronizer.
Automatic Audio selection from video source (embedded audio) or associated 16 channels of Audio received via TDM.
TDM Audio channels if present (i.e. routed from the Audio crosspoint) take precedence over channels de-embedded from the video source.
Fixed mapping of Audio channels received via TDM and the eight SDI streams
(e.g. TDM1-16 -> SDI1, TDM17-32 -> SD).
Audio Processing Notes
De-embedding: For De-embedding, audio must be embedded synchronously at a sample rate of
48kHz.
Embedded Dolby-E frames must be properly aligned with the Video frame in order to be transferred from the Frame Synchronizer’s input clock domain into the output clock domain. Proper alignment
(position of guard-band) is important since Dolby-E frames can be dropped or repeated alongside the active video content.
TDMed Audio All Audio channels received from the Audio crosspoint via TDM are assumed to have a
48kHz sample rate and locked to the same Video reference applied to the board.
Automatic Dolby-E header alignment supported for Dolby-E data received via TDM, where Audio data (PCM or non-PCM) is expected to be already synchronous to the reference applied to the board. When receiving Dolby-E data via TDM, alignment with the actual Video data is unknown and it is therefore important to have the Dolby- E data automatically re-aligned prior to muxing it back into the SDI stream.
Sample Rate Conversion is applied to both, de-embedded and TDM Audio data, but only if it is PCM.
The downstream clock for the SRCs will be locked to the applied Video reference. Non-PCM Audio data (such as Dolby-E/D) cannot be sample rate converted.
If Non-PCM Audio originates from the ingested SDI channel ('embedded Audio'), it is transferred from the input clock domain to the output clock domain by dropping or repeating a full frame of non-PCM data, every time the Video Frame Synchronizer reaches its roll-over point.
If Non-PCM Audio is received via TDM, it is expected to be already in the output clock domain and therefore the SRC in the TDM path gets automatically bypassed.
Video Processing
SD-SDI (270Mb/s) standards - 525, 625
HD-SDI (1.5Gb/s) standards - 720p50, 720p59, 720p60, 1080i50, 1080i59.94, 1080i60, 1080psF24,
1080psF23
HD-SDI (3Gb/s) standards – SMPTE425 Level A, SMPTE 372M Dual Link
Framesync mode or Delay mode
Freeze modes: Frame, Field1, Field2
High noise immunity (TRS error resilience) and glitchless processing (fast switching without freeze) of input feeds, that were asynchronously switched on the recommended switching point (as defined in SMPTE RP168)
User selectable Loss-of-Video modes: Black, Freeze, Pass, Mute
Video Frame Synchronizer with H,V Phase control and fixed frame delay on top of variable delay
Video Frame Delay: up to 16 Frames (all standards)
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 139
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer/Demultiplexer Modules
Video ProcAmp: Gain, Offset, Hue, Black/White Clip
SMPTE 352M Video Payload: Detection, Insertion (HD and 3G only)
EDH (SD) and CRC (HD): Detection, Insertion
Automatic ASI detection and bypass
Video Processing Notes
VANC/HANC data other than embedded Audio is not processed. Closed Captioning data, Teletext data or SMPTE 12M Timecode (LTC, VITC), for instance, will be dropped or repeated together with the active video content, every time the Frame Synchronizer drops or repeats a frame.
VANC/HANC data for Delay mode channels (including embedded Audio) is passed through the delay memory unprocessed. Ancillary data remains untouched. The absolute delay from In to Out can be changed arbitrarily within the predefined limits (e.g. from 3us up to 16 frames + 3us).
SMPTE 372M Dual-Link formats supported, with 16 (mono) channels of Audio processed. Processed
Video/Audio data exits the board as a single 3Gb/s stream.
Non-PCM Audio data (Dolby-E or Dolby-D) is not processed by the Audio Synchronizer / Audio Delay
/ Audio ProcAmp processing blocks. If it originated from 'embedded audio', it is passed alongside the active video content through the Video Frame Synchronizer memory and a frame's worth of non-
PCM data is dropped or repeated - together with the active video content every time the Video
Frame Synchronizer drops or repeats a frame.
Quiet Audio Switching
Switching between two sources of the same data- and frame-rate in the serial domain, e.g. on a router’s crosspoint board, can cause momentary discontinuities in the SDI stream. It doesn't matter whether the two sources are asynchronous or not, a temporary glitch in the resulting SDI stream can cause downstream equipment to generate an erroneous output.
The Output module can absorb such glitches and will provide not only a continuous and uninterrupted stream of video, it will also handle the transitioning of embedded Audio from one source to another in a
‘quiet’ manner. In order to accomplish that, the following conditions must be met:
The two video sources, that get switched upstream, must be of the same data- and frame-rate. They can be asynchronous with respect to each other and with respect to the reference signal that is applied to the board.
The channel that is supposed to produce a clean and quiet output must be operated in Frame Sync mode (Frame Sync license is required).
ADS Clean must be turned on.
Note: ADS Clean ON will wipe out any embedded non-PCM audio data, such as Dolby-E. If a quiet audio transition between two sources, which contain a mix of PCM and non-PCM audio data, is desired, it is recommended to bring in the non-PCM data via TDM.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 140
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer/Demultiplexer Modules
PX-HSRMX-OBG Specifications
Electrical Output (Back Module with 16 HD-BNCs)
Items
Number of Outputs
Connector
Impedance
ASI (270 Mb/s)
SD SDI (270 Mb/s)
Format
Return Loss
Specification
16 (HD-BNC)
Amphenol HD-BNC
75 ohms
SMPTE 259M
525i59.94, 625i50
> 15 dB from 5 MHz to 270 MHz
SMPTE 292M
HD SDI (1.5 Gb/s)
Format and Image Sample Structure SMPTE274M (1080i, 1080psF, 1080p)
SMPTE296M (720p)
Return Loss
HD SDI (3 Gb/s)
> 15 dB (typical) from 5 MHz to 1485 MHz
SMPTE 424M
Format and Image Sample Structure SMPTE 425M Level A
SMPTE 372M
Return Loss > 15 dB (typical) from 5 MHz to 1485 MHz
> 10 dB (typical) from 1485 MHz to 2970 MHz
Electrical Output (Back Module with DensiShield)
Item
Number of Outputs
Connector
Impedance
Amplitude
Supported Cable Type
Supported Cable Length
Formats
Specification
8
FCI DensiShield
100 ohms differential
800 mV differenial
FCI 10116746-R0600BULF
6m
ASI, SD SDI, HD SDI, 3G SDI
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 141
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer/Demultiplexer Modules
Electrical Input (Back Module with DensiShield)
Item
Number of Inputs
Connector
Impedance
Amplitude
Supported Cable Type
Supported Cable Length
Formats
Specification
8
FCI DensiShield
100 ohms differential
800 mV differenial
FCI 10116746-R0600BULF
6m
ASI, SD SDI, HD SDI, 3G SDI
Optical Output (Fiber Back Modules with SFPs)
Item
Number of Outputs
Package
Connector
Wavelengths
Output Power
Specification
16
Dual Channel Transmitter SFP Modules
LC with PC/UPC polish (single mode fiber)
1310nm, 1550nm (single mode fiber)
-5 dBm min, 0 dBm max (Gennum GF2922)
Supported Video rates
Bit Error Rate
270Mb/s, 1.5Gb/s, 3Gb/s
Supported Formats and Sampling
Structures
ASI, SD SDI, HD SDI, 3G SDI
Complies with SMPTE 297-2006
Note: Gennum is the supported SFP for all Platinum Framesync Optical Modules.
PX-HSRMX-OBG Operation
Power-Up Sequence
Due to the complexity of the board and its parameter list, it takes about 2 minutes after power-cycling a board before it is fully operational.About 10 seconds after power-cycling, a board is ready to detect input signals, but the outputs will not become active until the Resource card has completed uploading the previously used configuration (parameters).
The readiness of the board is reflected by the read-only Control Status parameter. (See General
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 142
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer/Demultiplexer Modules
Firmware Upgrade and Backup Image
The modules maintain a backup image of the last working firmware at all times. In the event of an upgrade failure, the module will revert back to its backup image to maintain operation on the board.
You can verify the version that is currently running on the module by looking at the version parameter
Version (MK20_App_S6_V6). See General Parameters (on page 145).
Upgrading the firmware on the modules takes approximately 30 minutes. Multiple (identical) boards can be upgraded at once in batches of up to 16 boards (= one 'zone'). A 'batch' upgrade takes about as long as upgrading a single board.
Always wait for the 'Firmware upgrade successful' message before power-cycling the system, exchanging boards, or carrying out any other maintenance work that could interfere with the upgrade process. Do not interrupt the power supply or tamper with a board while an upgrade is in progress. This could corrupt the firmware, necessitating a restart of the upgrade process.
After a successful firmware upgrade, the upgraded board(s) will automatically reboot and will start unpacking the newly installed firmware components. This process can take up to 2 minutes and should not be interrupted. In case the board is removed from the frame or a power outage happens whilst the board is preparing the newly installed firmware, it will retry as soon as the board is plugged back into the frame or power is resumed.
LED Indicators
LED Indicators on the board signal the following:
Power Good
Power On Self Test Passed
Temperature Alarm
Communication Activity
SDI Signal Presence (8 LEDs, 1 per output)
Status LEDs for Status and Diagnostics
Jumpers and DIP Switches
This module has no user configurable jumpers.
The two DIP Switches, labeled SW1 and SWC2, must remain in their factory set default positions - OFF.
Failsafe Module Upgrade
The Flash Memory can be partially or entirely upgraded through the PIPE interface. In case of upgrade issues due to power failures or system instability during upgrade, the last known good working version is automatically reverted to.
Power Consumption
The maximum power consumption is 75 watts when all 16 fiber outputs are running at 3 Gb/s.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 143
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer/Demultiplexer Modules
Functional Block Diagram
PT-HSRMX-OBG / PX-HSRMX-OBG Data Flow (firmware version 2.1 or higher)
Processing FPGA
– one channel shown
DDR2
Memory
SDI In
(from Wideband XPT)
SDI Rx
Deserializer
Descrambler
Reframer
CRC/EDH Monitoring
SDI Format Detection
ASI Detection
ASI Flag
Pt-/ PX-TDM
128 Channels
Encapsulated Audio data is expected to be synchronous to Video Reference
Audio TDM
Receiver
Video Frame
Synchronizer
*
* requires license key
Clock
Transfer
FIFO
Primary Audio
Demultiplexer
(De-Embedder)
Non-PCM Data
Loss-of-Video
Audio
Fade
Sample Rate
Conversion
PCM
TDM16 Audio to other
Audio Processors in same FPGA
Non-PCM Data
Sample Rate
Conversion
(for Tracking of variable Video delay only)
PCM
DL
B2A
Video
ProcAmp
DL
A2B
Bypass
DL
Demux
Link A Link B
DL
Delay
Test Tone
Generator
Audio
Synchronizer &
Delay
DDR2
Memory
Audio
ProcAmp
Allow embedding if Source (Embedded) is PCM
Allow embedding if Source comes from TDM
Allow embedding if Testtones are enabled
Audio Multiplexer
(Embedder)
DL
Mux
EmbChEn
SDI Tx
CRC Insertion
LineNum Insertion
Scrambler
Serializer
Bypass Mux for ASI
ASI Flag
SDI Out
(to Cable Driver or SFP Tx)
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 144
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer/Demultiplexer Modules
PX-HSRMX-OBG Controllable Parameters
The Platinum IP3 Module can be controlled via the Controller. When you access a module (by clicking on it in the list of modules), its parameters are displayed. The total number of modules (of that type) in the frame is also displayed on the left.
General Parameters
Name
Physical Info >
Temperature
(TABLE PARAMETER)
Physical Info >
Fan Status
(TABLE PARAMETER)
Serial Number
Description
Indicates the temperature of the
FPGA
Indicates proper functioning of the module’s fan unit
License Key
Displays the module’s unique identifier
Activates the Frame Sync option
Type Options
RO <String> in Degrees
Celsius
RO
RO
RW
<String>
<String>
<String>
Licensed Options Displays activated options RO
Parameter Update Rate Defines the rate at which parameters are updated
Control Status
Reports current Control Status.
Note that the module remains in a
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential.
RW
RO
None
Frame Sync
Slow
Medium
Fast
Please Wait
Ready to Set
February 2015 | Page 145
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Name
Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer/Demultiplexer Modules
Description
'frozen' state until this status reports
'Ready to Set'.
Type Options
V-Bit Mute Enable RW
Yes
No
Dolby E Auto Align RW
Ver (MK20_App_S6_V6) Lists version numbers of individual firmware components.
RO
Module Status Reports current Module Status. RO
<String>
Module Ready
Firmware Upgrade
Required
Module Over
Temperature
Genlock Parameters
Name
Sync Select
Genlock Video Present
Description
Selects which physical sync port the module uses as a reference
Reports the presence of the reference video signal
Genlock Video Locked Reports the locked status of the reference video signal
Type Options
RW
Sync 1
Sync 2
Sync 3
Sync 4
RO
No
Yes
RO
No
Yes
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 146
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Name Description
Genlock Standard
Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer/Demultiplexer Modules
Indicates the video standard detected on the genlock input
Type Options
RO
Unknown
525i 59.94
625i 50
720p 25
720p 29.97
720p 30
720p 50
720p 59.94
720p 60
1080p 23.98
1080p 24
1080p 29.97
1080p 30
1080p 25
1080i 50
1080i 59.94
1080i 60
1080sF 23.98
1080sF 24
Processed Outputs
Video
Processed
Outputs >
Video
Name
SDI Video Standard
Description
Displays the SDI video signal standard
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential.
Type Options
RO
Unknown
525i 59.94
625i 50
720p 25
720p 29.97
720p 30
720p 50
720p 59.94
720p 60
1080p 23.98
1080p 24
1080p 29.97
1080p 30
1080p 25
February 2015 | Page 147
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Name
Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer/Demultiplexer Modules
Signal Presence (1-8)
EDH Present
Dolby E Detection
Description Type Options
Reports the presence of
EDH in the input SDI
1080i 50
1080i 59.94
1080i 60
1080p 50
1080p 59.94
1080p 60
1080p 50 DL
1080p 59.94 DL
1080p 60 DL
1080sF 23.98
1080sF 24
ASI
Indicates presence of
SDI or ASI signal. ASI signals will automatically bypass all processing stages.
RO
Yes
No
RO
Yes
No
CRC/EDH Error Counter Reports the number of chrominance CRC/EDH errors that have occurred
CRC/EDH Error Clear
RW
No
Yes
Clears all CRC/EDH error counters
RW
No
Yes
Allows Dolby E detection based on presence of
Dolby E Header. Can be used with or without
PCM/non-PCM Channel
Status Bit correction.
See Dolby E Detection
RW
Non-Audio Channel
Status Bit Only
Dolby Header
Detection
Dolby Header
Detection with Cbit
Correction
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 148
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Audio
Processed
Outputs >
Audio
Name
Group Presence
TDM Audio
ADS Clean
Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer/Demultiplexer Modules
Description Type Options
Reports the presence of the specified audio group in the SDI signal
Enables embedding of
Audio Channels received from the ATDM board.
Each instance of this control applies to all 16
Mono Channels of Audio
(or 8 Stereo pairs) of an
SDI stream. If set to
'Yes', only those TDM channels, which are connected in the Audio cross-point's matrix, will be embedded into the outgoing SDI stream.
Disconnected Stereo pairs will be automatically replaced by whatever has been de-embedded from the incoming SDI stream.
Group 1
Group 2
Group 12
Group 3
Group 13
Group 23
Group 123
Group 4
Group 14
Group 24
Group 124
Group 34
Group 134
Group 234
RW
Yes
No
Enables and disables the cleaning of the Ancillary
Data Space before embedding audio
RW
Yes
No
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 149
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer/Demultiplexer Modules
Name Description Type Options
Fade Rate
Word Length
Dolby E Start Line (Ln)
Fade rate applies to all
16 audio channels in a video stream
Specifies the audio word length for all 16 channels in a video stream.
See Word Length
RW
0 - 10 s, in 1 s steps
(1
s)
RW
16 bits
20 bits
24 bits
Determines the Dolby-E start line
RW
Range is mode specific and complies with
Dolby-E specification
Proc Amp
Processed
Outputs > Proc
Amp
Name
Y Gain (dB)
Cb Gain (dB)
Cr Gain (dB)
Y Offset (mV)
Description
Adjusts gain for the Y channel
Type Options
RW
-3.0 to +3.0 dB (0 dB) in 0.1 dB steps
Adjusts gain to the Cb color difference component
Adjusts gain to the Cr color difference component
Adjusts offset for the Y channel
RW
RW
RW
-3.0 to +3.0 dB (0 dB) in 0.1 dB steps
-3.0 to +3.0 dB (0 dB) in 0.1 dB steps
±100.6 mV (0 mV) in
0.8 mV increments
Cb Offset (mV) Adjusts offset for the Cb channel
RW
±100.6 mV (0 mV) in
0.8 mV increments
Cr Offset (mV) Adjusts offset for the Cr channel
RW
White Clip Enable
Controls level clipping according to the White
Clip Level control
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential.
RW
±100.6 mV (0 mV) in
0.8 mV increments
Disable
Enable
February 2015 | Page 150
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Name
White Clip Level (mV)
Black Clip Enable
Black Clip Level (mV)
Hue
Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer/Demultiplexer Modules
Description
Sets the white clip level
Type Options
RW
Controls level clipping according to the Black
Clip Level control
RW
636.9 to 763.1 mV
(700 mV) in 0.8 mV increments
Disable
Enable
Sets the black clip level RW -47.9 to +47.9 mV (0.0 mV) in 0.8 mV increments
Adjusts the hue of the incoming digital video signal
RW -180 to +180° (0°)
Frame Sync
Name Description Type Options
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 151
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Name
Horizontal Phase (us)
Processed
Outputs >
Frame Sync
Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer/Demultiplexer Modules
Description
Adjusts the horizontal timing
Type Options
RW
0.000 us to 29.616 us (1080p 30, 1035i
60)
0.000 us to 14.808 us (1080p 60, 080p
60 DL)
0.000 us to 29.646 us (1080p 29, 1080i
59)
0.000 us to 14.823 us (1080p 59, 1080p
59.94 DL)
0.000 us to 35.542 us (1080p 25, 1080i
50)
0.000 us to 17.771 us (1080p 50, 1080p
50 DL)
0.000 us to 37.024 us (1080p 24,
1080sF 24)
0.000 us to 37.061 us (1080p 23.98,
1080sF 23.98)
0.000 us to 31.987 us (1080i 50_295)
0.000 us to 22.209 us (720p 60)
0.000 us to 22.231 us (720p 59.94)
0.000 us to 26.653 us (720p 50)
0.000 us to 44.431 us (720p 30)
0.000 us to 44.475 us (720p 29)
0.000 us to 53.320 us (720p 25)
0.000 us to 63.518 us (525i 59.94)
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 152
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer/Demultiplexer Modules
Name Description Type Options
Vertical Phase (lines)
Frame Offset (frames)
Force Freeze
Force Freeze Mode
Loss of Video Mode
Fast Switch
Frame Sync/Mux Mode
Frame Sync/Mux Status
Adjusts the vertical timing
Determines the number of frames the video is offset
Enables video freeze
Specifies the type of freeze, field 1, field 2 or frame
Specifies operation on loss of video, pass, black or freeze.
Enable fast switching
Sets the operational mode of the frame sync delay or sync.
Reflects operational mode status based on license, mode of operation, presence, and rate of Reference signal.
RW
0–1124 lines
(1080p/I/sF)
0–1249 lines
(1080i 50 SMPTE
295M)
0–749 lines (720p)
0–524 lines (525i
59.94)
0–624 lines (625i 50)
RW
0 - 17 frames (Delay mode)
0 - 16 frames
(Sync mode)
RW
No
Yes
RW
Field 1
Field 2
Frame
RW
Pass
Black
Freeze
RW
No
Yes
RW
FS: Sync Mode
FS: Delay Mode
Mux: Auto Detect
Mux: Always On
Bypass
RW
FS: Ext Lock
FS: Local Lock
FS: Delay Forced
FS: Delay Rate
Mismatch
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 153
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Name
Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer/Demultiplexer Modules
Description Type Options
Audio Group
Processed
Outputs >
Audio Group
Name
Active Channels
DeEmbed Control
Embedding Mode
Description Type Options
Indicates which channels are active
RO
None
CH1
CH2
CH12
CH3
CH13
CH23
CH123
CH4
CH14
CH24
CH124
CH34
CH134
CH234
CH1234
RW
Mute
Repeat
Specifies the operation of the audio deembedder when an error occurs; it will either repeat the last audio sample or mute when an error occurs.
See DeEmbed Control
Selects the embedding mode for the specified audio group
RW
Off
Append
OverWrite
Auto
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 154
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Audio Stereo Pair
Name
Processed
Outputs >
Audio Channel
Audio Format
Tone
TDM Presence
TDM Format
Channel Delay (ms)
Level Adjust (dB)
Polarity Reversal
Auto Mute
Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer/Demultiplexer Modules
Description Type Options
Indicates if the audio channel is PCM or non-
PCM audio
RO
PCM
Non-PCM
Enables Tones
Indicates presence of
TDM Audio Channels
Indicates format of TDM channels (e.g. PCM
Audio)
RW
Off
400 Hz
2 KHz
4 KHz
RO
Yes
No
RO
PCM
Non-PCM
Specifies audio delay - per mono channel. See
Audio Synchronization
RW 0 - 3000 ms in 1 ms steps
Adjusts the audio level
(gain) for each audio channel
RW -18 dB - 18 dB (0) in
0.1 dB steps
Specifies whether the audio channel should be inverted
RW
No
Yes
Enables muting for the specified output channel
RW
Off
On
Audio Channel
Processed
Outputs >
Audio Stereo
Pair
Name
SRC Control
Description
Engages or disengages the sample rate converter
Type Options
RW
Auto
Enable
Bypass
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 155
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer/Demultiplexer Modules
Name Description Type Options
Delay Track
Summing
By toggling one of the eight Reset Toggle A /
Reset Toggle B parameters of the selected SDI channel instance, Audio Rd/Wr pointers in the Audio
Synchronizer, affecting all eight Stereo pairs of the selected SDI channel, will be reset.
Specifies whether to sum the audio within a pair
Left to Right - the summed audio is placed in the right channel
Right to Left - the summed audio is placed in the left channel
Both - the summed audio is placed in both left and right channels
RW
RW
Reset Toggle A
Reset Toggle B
None
Right to left
Left to right
Both
Swap/Copy Specifies whether to swap or copy the audio within a pair; able to swap left and right channels, copy left channel to the right channel, and copy the right channel to the left
Loss of TDM Aud Mode The mode of operation can be selected on a per
Stereo Pair basis.
Instead of automatically switching back to the associated ‘Embedded’
Audio Pair in case the
TDM gets disconnected in the ATDM matrix, the user can now select
‘Silence’ instead.
RW
No Swap
Swap
Right to left
Left to right
Embedded Audio
Silence
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 156
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Unprocessed Outputs
Unprocessed
Outputs
Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer/Demultiplexer Modules
Name
Reclocked Signal
Presence
Description
Reports the presence of the SDI signal that becomes one of the unprocessed outputs
Type Options
RO
No
Yes
Reclocked Data Rate
Reclocked Output Swing
For Back modules featuring electrical unprocessed outputs,
only.
Reports the data rate of the SDI signals that becomes one of the unprocessed outputs.
RO
Unknown
SD
HD
3G
Used to set the output swing. Default is 800mV.
RW
800mV
1600mV
Reclocked Output Mute
Enables/Disables electrical (BNC) output.
RW
No
Yes
For Back modules featuring electrical unprocessed outputs,
only.
Reclocked Laser Enable
Enables or disables fiber optical output
RW
Yes
No
For Back modules featuring optical unprocessed outputs,
only.
Reclocked Laser Status
For Back modules featuring optical unprocessed outputs,
only.
Reports laser status RO
Normal
Failed
Disabled
No SFP
Notes:
Word Length Parameter
The Word Length parameter can be set through the Audio section of the GUI to 16, 20, or 24 bits on a per SDI channel basis. 20 bits is the default and is applicable when the video standard is SD SDI
(525/625).
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 157
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer/Demultiplexer Modules
If the SD SDI Video has extended Audio packets (which can apply to any of up to four groups of embedded Audio), Audio data embedded in such group(s) should have a word length of 24 bits. When the processed audio data word length is 20 bits (determined by parameter ‘Word Length' parameter), the Audio Embedder cannot overwrite existing extended Audio packets. There are 2 options in this case:
Turn on ADS Clean (See ADS Clean (1-8) (TABLE PARAMETER)) prior to re-embedding new Audio data, to wipe out any existing Audio packets (regular and extended).
Set the Word Length parameter for the SDI channel in question to match the word length of the
Audio data embedded in the incoming SDI stream.
The Word Length bits for processed Audio data are not auto-detected (based on the detected word length of the embedded Audio data) and set. This is to allow the flexibility for users to steer the word length of the re-embedded Audio data such that it matches the word length of Audio data that originates from a different source (for example, Audio received via TDM).
Fast Video Switch
When input video is switched between two sources while both sources are within vertical blanking, use the Fast Switch (TABLE PARAMETER) parameter to enable fast video switching between the sources. In this mode, output video is not frozen when both sources are within the vertical blanking area when the switch takes place.
DeEmbed Control
The following are options for the DeEmbed Control parameter.
Item
Repeat
Mute
Description
Upon detection of a de-embedding error, the deembedder repeats the last good AES sample.
Upon detection of a de-embedding error, the deembedder mutes the current outgoing AES sample.
Dolby E Detection
SDI streams originating from 3rd party equipment may not always have the PCM/Non-PCM Channel
Status Bits set correctly when transporting Dolby-E. The PCM/non-PCM Channel Status bit (short ‘Cbit’) is intended to indicate that the embedded AES3 data stream is of non-PCM nature (see also SMPTE
337M).
Dolby E Detection, based on the presence of a Dolby E Header, is an alternative method and should be used in cases where the Cbit is incorrectly set. It is important for the downstream Audio processing to know what type of Audio (linear PCM or non-PCM) it is dealing with in order to not to destroy Dolby E data, for instance, by the sample-rate-conversion process, linear PCM data would normally undergo.
Based on the detected Dolby E Header, an incorrectly set Cbit can be corrected for non-PCM Audio data
(Dolby E) that exits the board via TDM. If the correction is not enabled, a TDM Receiver without Dolby E
Header detection/correction will not be able to identify the audio stream as non-PCM, hence Dolby E data might get destroyed on its path through the Output processing module.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 158
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer/Demultiplexer Modules
Audio Embedding Modes
Each video channel has an audio embedder component composed of several smaller subcomponent blocks:
One ancillary data stripper (ADS)
Four audio embedding subcomponents
The first subcomponent is an ancillary data stripper (ADS). This block removes all ancillary data packets in the input SDI stream, prior to embedding. Following the ADS block are four separate audioembedding subcomponents. Each subcomponent has the ability to operate on only one audio group, either appending or overwriting a predetermined group onto the SDI stream.
The audio embedding modes are Audio Group (1–4) Embedding Mode parameters.
Embedding Mode Options
Table 76: Embedding Mode Options
Option Description
Append Attempts to insert the audio data and control packets immediately following the last existing audio data/control packet in the horizontal ancillary region. See
Append Embedding (on page 159).
OverWrite Attempts to overwrite existing audio data and control packets of the same group number with the new audio data. See OverWrite Embedding (on page
Auto
Off
Attempts first to overwrite existing audio data and control packets of the same audio group number; failing that, it appends the new audio data and control packets immediately following the last existing audio data/control packet (refer to the Audio Group (1–4) Exists parameters to determine what audio groups are already present in the incoming SDI signal).
Disables embedding of audio data and control packets on a per group basis.
Append Embedding
When you select Append embedding, the module attempts to insert the audio data and control packets immediately following the last existing data/control packet in the horizontal ancillary data space (ADS).
Append embedding is only valid if the audio group to be embedded does not already exist.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 159
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer/Demultiplexer Modules
The following figure shows how append embedding will appear in the ancillary data space when there is no previous audio or other data.
Figure 62: Append Embedding Mode, Adding Group 1 When No Other Data Present
Figure 63:
When auxiliary data exists in the ancillary data space, appended audio appears following that data.
Figure 64: Append Embedding Mode, Adding Group 1 When Auxiliary Data Present
If you attempt to insert audio into Group 1 when Group 1 audio data already exists in the ancillary data space, no audio will be embedded.
Figure 65: Append Embedding Mode - Adding Group 1 and a Group 1 Already Exists
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 160
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer/Demultiplexer Modules
If you insert Group 2 audio when there is pre-existing Group 1 audio in the ancillary data space and no
Group 2 audio, the Group 2 audio will be inserted following the Group 1 audio.
Figure 66: Append Embedding Mode, Adding Group 2 Following Group 1
If you insert Group 1 audio when there is pre-existing Group 2 audio in the ancillary data space and no
Group 1 audio, the Group 1 audio will be inserted following the Group 2 audio.
Figure 67: Append Embedding Mode, Adding Group 2 Following Group 1
An audio group cannot be divided. In Append embedding, the audio group is always added following the last block in the ADS. If there is not enough room to append the audio group following the last block of auxiliary data or audio in the ADS, no audio will be embedded.
Figure 68: Append Embedding Mode Fails to Append When Auxiliary Data Exists in all Audio Groups
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 161
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
OverWrite Embedding
Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer/Demultiplexer Modules
When you select Overwrite embedding, the module attempts to overwrite any existing audio data and control packets of the same group number with the new audio data. This setting is valid only if the audio group to be embedded already exists. If the new sample distribution does not exactly match the existing audio data packet sample distribution, the embedder will mark some audio data packets for deletion
(DID word will be set to 180h).When you attempt Overwrite embedding and there is no previous audio, no audio is embedded because there is nothing to overwrite.
Figure 69: Overwrite Embedding Mode When There is No Pre-existing Audio
The following figure shows how overwrite embedding will appear in the ancillary data space when there is auxiliary data where Group 1 should be inserted.
Figure 70: Overwrite Embedding Mode When There is Auxiliary Data on Group 1
The following figure shows how overwrite embedding will appear in the ancillary data space when there is pre-existing Group 1 audio. This operation is successful.
Figure 71: Overwrite Embedding Mode When There is Group 1 Audio in the Group 1 Space
Audio Synchronization
By default, the modules synchronize de-embedded audio with timing information from the video frame synchronizer prior to re-embedding audio. PCM Audio (either from embedded or from TDM), will be automatically delayed to match the video delay. Additionally, up to three seconds of delay can be added through the Channel Delay parameter.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 162
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Video Frame Synchronization
Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer/Demultiplexer Modules
The Frame synchronizer offers two modes: Delay mode and Synchronizer (Sync) mode. These modes can be chosen using the Frame Sync / Mux Mode (1-8) parameter.
In Delay mode, the output video is synchronized to the input video.
In Sync mode, the output video is synchronized to the reference video. The reference standard you can use depends on the output video standard set.
Reference
Standard
Output Video
Standard
525i 59.94
1080i 59.94
1080p 59.94
1080p 29.97
720p 59.94
525i 59.94
1080p 59.94 DL
625i 50
720p 60
1080i 50
1080p 50
1080p 25
720p 50
625i 50
1080p 50 DL
720p 60
1080p 60
Reference
Standard
1080i 60
1080p 30
Output Video
Standard
1080i 60
1080p 60
1080p 30
720p 60
1080p 60 DL
720p 59.94
720p 59.94
1080p 59.94
1080i 59.94
1080p 29.97
1080i 50
1080p 25
1080p 24
1080sF 24
1080i 59.94
1080p 29.97
1080p 59.94
720p 59.94
525i 59.94
1080p 59.94 DL
1080i 50
1080p 50
1080p 25
720p 50
625i 50
1080p 50 DL
1080p 24
1080sF 24
720p 50
720p 50
1080p 50
1080p 23.98
1080sF
23.98
1080p 23.98
1080sF 23.98
In both Sync mode and Delay mode, several controls are available to manipulate the output video signal:
Horizontal Phase - To adjust the horizontal timing.
Vertical Phase - To adjust the vertical timing.
Frame Offset- Adjustable frame delay.
Force Freeze - To manually freeze output video on first or second field (interlaced standards), or on the whole frame (all standards).
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 163
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer/Demultiplexer Modules
PX-HSRMX-OBG Configuration
Follow these steps to configure your PX-HSRMX-OBG Output Frame Sync card.
1. Launch Navigator. Discover your IP3 device and create a Routing System.
2. Run the DB Editor.
3. Create 2 Device Types: HD Embedded and HD Video
4. Follow the Wizard to create the HD Embedded Device type
When creating the HD Embedded Device type, in the Level Selection dialog box, set the Number of embedded audio channels to 16 (default is 10).
5. Follow the Wizard to create the HD Video device type.
6. Open the IP3 Database Editor from Navigator. Go to the Destinations tab.
7. Click the Add button to add the 8 processed outputs
Use the HD Embedded device type add logical destinations for the 8 processed outputs
Enter 8 for the number of Destinations to create
Ensure the Slot number corresponds to the Slot that contains your HSR module
Change the Name prefix to clearly identify these as Processed outputs, for example, ProcX
Ensure the Index is set to 1
This adds 8 Outputs (Ports 1-8) with 1 video (Video 1) and 16 Audio (Audio 1-15) channels. Check that the entries have been correctly created in the upper and lower panes.
8. Click the Add button again to add the 8 unprocessed outputs.
Note: Unprocessed outputs are available on the same 8 physical ports as the processed ones, but the actual video channel is Video 2. After inserting unprocessed destinations, the location for each video channel on them needs to be manually changed to use Video 2 channel instead of Video 1. So
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 164
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer/Demultiplexer Modules create just 1 destination defined as Video 2, and then add the remaining 7, which inherit the Video 2 definition.
Use the HD Video device type to add a logical destination
Enter 1 for the number of Destinations to create
Ensure the Slot number corresponds to the Slot that contains your HSR module
Change the Name prefix to clearly identify these as Unprocessed outputs, for example, UnprocX
Select Port 1 in the Port drop down
Ensure the Index is set to 1
9. Once created, double click this in the lower pane and change from Video 1 to Video 2
10. Click the Add button again to add 7 more sources; ensure you start at Port 2.
11. This completes the definition for the 8 processed and 8 unprocessed outputs.
12. Check that the unprocessed output entries have been properly created
13. Validate and Save.
14. Open the DB Editor and Publish.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 165
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Multichannel Audio Digital Interface (MADI) Modules
Multichannel Audio Digital Interface
(MADI) Modules
MADI (Serial Multichannel Audio Digital Interface) is an industry-standard electronic communications protocol that defines the data format and electrical characteristics of an interface carrying multiple channels of digital audio. MADI supports multi-channel audio transmission through copper (coaxial) cable or multi mode fiber cable.
MADI is widely used in the audio industry, especially in the professional sector. Its advantages over other audio digital interface protocols and standards are support of a greater number of channels per line.
MADI support enables seamless integration of Audio Consoles and other third party Audio equipment with MADI I/O into the Imagine Communications Audio/Video routing framework. MADI support is offered through the following standard full length boards:
A four channel MADI input board with electrical or optical back module.
A four channel MADI output board with electrical or optical back module
See PT-MADI4X-OBG Output Module on page 284.
Figure 72: MADI Input and Output Modules (and other audio routing options) in a Frame
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 166
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Multichannel Audio Digital Interface (MADI) Modules
Note: This diagram represents Platinum MADI as well as other audio routing options in the Platinum frame. For details, refer to the relevant modules in the Input Modules and Output Modules chapters of this manual.
MADI Input Module (PT-MADI4X-IBG)
The PT-MADI4C-IBG / PT-MADI4O-IBG input module is an AES10-2008 compliant audio input board that supports three MADI formats: 32 channel (96kHz sample rate) and 56 or 64 channels (48 kHz sample rate).
The PT-MADI4X-IBG is user configurable between one and four inputs, each up to 64 Audio mono channels (32 AES stereo pairs) of PCM Audio. The four MADI input streams can comprise up to 256 mono channels, but a maximum of 128 mono channels can be mapped to the TDM stream. All inputs are converted to a common 48kHz sample rate prior to merging 128 mono channels into a single TDM stream.
Figure 73: PT-MADI4C-IBG Input Module (with electrical back module attached)
Figure 74: PT-MADI4O-IBG Input Module
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 167
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Variants
Multichannel Audio Digital Interface (MADI) Modules
Electrical Back Module
The electrical back module is an active back module attached to the front module with two brackets and with Cable Equalizers. The back module has four BNC connectors and stays attached to the front module when pulling the module from the frame. The back module is fully MADI compliant in terms of its electrical characteristics.
Figure 75: PT-MADI4C-IBG electrical back module
Optical Back Module
The optical back module hosts the cages for up to four Dual-Rx Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP) Fiber
Optic Receivers. In connection with the PT-MADI-IBG front module, only two of the four ‘cages’ will be used. The back module has to be mounted onto the frame and the Front Module detaches from the
Back Module when the Front Module is pulled out from the frame. One Dual-Rx SFP module is preinstalled. The SFP module complies with the AES10-2008 requirements for optical interfaces. See PT-
MADI4O-IBG Specifications (on page 174) for details.
Figure 76: PT-MADI4O-IBG optical back module
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 168
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Multichannel Audio Digital Interface (MADI) Modules
Controlling the MADI Input Module through the Controller
You can access and control PT-MADI4X-IBG parameters through the Controller by selecting it in the list of modules and then clicking Open Module.
MADI Presence
MADI Presence on each of the four input streams is automatically detected and reported in the MADI
Present section of the MADI Input category.
If MADI is present, the following information is reported:
The number of channels per input stream (32, 56, or 64) along with the sample rate for each stream.
Each MADI input is divided into chunks of 16 channels (1-16, 17-32, 33-48, and 49-64) and these are reported as active or not.
TDM Mapping
Through the PT-MADI4X-IBG parameter interface, channels in MADI inputs can be manually mapped to the TDM stream and you can select if one or all of the MADI inputs contribute to the stream. A maximum of 128 mono channels can be mapped to the TDM stream.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 169
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Multichannel Audio Digital Interface (MADI) Modules
The Mapping parameter category provides a MADI to TDM map section in which you can select the channels in each stream to map to the TDM.
For each of the 4 inputs, you can choose whether or not its channels contribute to the TDM stream.
Unused channels in the TDM stream are muted. Mapping from MADI inputs to the TDM stream has a granularity of 32 channels, aligned at 32-channel boundaries. 56 channel formats are treated as 64 channel formats, with the unused uppermost channels always muted.
The following table shows how signals are processed, based on the actual input present and the MADI to
TDM map settings.
If the selected MADI input is not present, associated channels on the TDM bus are muted and marked as inactive.
Table 77: Combinations of MADI to TDM map selections and signal status
Input Status
No input present
No input present
32 channel input
MADI to TDM map Result
32 channels
56 or 64 channels
32 channels
32 channels allocated on the TDM bus for the MADI signal
All TDM channels are muted and inactive
64 channels allocated on the TDM bus for the MADI signal
All TDM channels are muted and inactive
32 channels allocated on the TDM bus for the MADI signal
All channels within input signal are passed
32 channel input
56 channel input
56 channel input
64 channel input
56 or 64 channels
32 channels
56 or 64 channels
32 channels
64 channels allocated on the TDM bus for the MADI signal
Channels within input signal are passed
The uppermost 32 TDM channels are muted and inactive
32 channels allocated on the TDM bus for the MADI signal
Channels 1 through 32 of input signal are passed
64 channels allocated on the TDM bus for the MADI signal
All channels of input signal are passed
Uppermost 8 TDM channels are muted and inactive
32 channels allocated on the TDM bus for the MADI signal
Channels 1 through 32 of input signal are passed
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 170
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
64 channel input 56 channels
Multichannel Audio Digital Interface (MADI) Modules
64 channel input 64 channels
64 channels allocated on the TDM bus for the MADI signal
Channels 1 through 56 of input signal are passed
Uppermost 8 TDM channels are muted and inactive
64 channels allocated on the TDM bus for the MADI signal
All channels with input signal are passed
Sample MADI to TDM Mapping Scenarios
The following are mapping use cases with different MADI configurations such 32 channel, 56 channel or
64 channel.
Four 32 channel MADI Inputs, all channels mapped (on page 171 )
Four 64 channel MADI Inputs, #1 and #3 mapped (on page 172)
Combination (32/56 channel) MADI Inputs, #3 and #4 mapped (on page 172)
Four 32 channel MADI Inputs, all channels mapped
This example depicts 4 MADI inputs with 32 channel inputs each. Since a total of 128 channels mappings are allowed, all four inputs can be mapped to the TDM.
In the Controller UI:
Open up the MADI Input Module
Go to Mapping in the navigation tree
Set all four MADI to TDM maps to 32
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 171
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Four 64 channel MADI Inputs, #1 and #3 mapped
Multichannel Audio Digital Interface (MADI) Modules
In this example, all MADI inputs are 64 channel. Since a total of 128 channels mappings are allowed, a maximum of two inputs can be mapped to the TDM. Inputs from MADI #1 and #3 have been selected for mapping.
In the Controller UI:
Open up the MADI Input Module
Go to Mapping in the navigation tree
Set all MADI Inputs 1 and 3 to 64 in the MADI to TDM Map
Combination (32/56 channel) MADI Inputs, #3 and #4 mapped
This example depicts different channel configurations in the incoming MADI. MADI inputs #1-3 are 32 channel. MADI input #4 is 56 channel. MADI Inputs #3 and #4 have been mapped to the TDM. All other channels are muted.
Other possible mapping scenarios in this situation include:
(1) mapping channels #1-3 (96 channels)
(2) mapping channel #4 (56 channels considered as 64 channels) plus two of three 32 channel inputs (64
channels).
In the Controller UI:
Open up the MADI Input Module
Go to Mapping in the navigation tree
Set all MADI Input 3 to 32 and MADI Input 4 to 56 in the MADI to TDM Map
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 172
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
MADI Audio Formats
Multichannel Audio Digital Interface (MADI) Modules
MADI sources and/or destinations are typically assigned as either Mono or Stereo format.
For Mono configuration, the default MADI mapping using the Multiplex Mono Audio Device Type can be used, since it maps 128 mono ports by default when inserting/adding logical sources and/or destinations. See below example:
Figure 77: MADI - Mono Audio Configuration
For Stereo configuration, and using the Multiplex Stereo Audio Device Type, the Audio channel must be kept at Audio 1 while incrementing the Port number between Left and Right audio channels.
For example, for stereo audio channel 1, ensure the assignments are:
Port 1: Audio 1 (left) and Port 2: Audio 1 (right).
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 173
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
For stereo audio channel 2, ensure the assignments are
Port 3: Audio 1 (left) and Port 4: Audio 1 (right).
Multichannel Audio Digital Interface (MADI) Modules
Figure 78: MADI - Stereo Audio Configuration
Input Specifications
PT-MADI4O-IBG Specifications
Table 78: Optical Input Specifications
Item
Number of Inputs
Specification
4
Fiber Type
Package
Multi-mode
2x Dual Channel Receiver SFP modules
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 174
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Item Specification
Connector
Wavelength
Multichannel Audio Digital Interface (MADI) Modules
LC with PC/UPC polish
Wideband, 1250nm-1380nm
Receiver Sensitivity
Link rate
Qualified devices
-30dBm (PIN Receiver)
125Mbit/s (4B5B encoded, NRZI)
Optoway SPM-3102W-2RG
PT-MADI4C-IBG Specifications
Table 79: Electrical Input Specifications
Item Specification
Number of Inputs
Connector
4
BNC (IEC169-8)
Impedance
Input Level
75
150mV to 600mV
Link rate
Return Loss
Equalization
125Mbit/s (4B5B encoded, NRZI)
NA
Adaptive cable equalization for up to 984 ft (300m), typical, of Belden 8281 coaxial cable
Input Power Consumption
Power Consumption
Table 80: PT-MADI4C-IBG Power Consumption
Power Consumption 15W
(includes front module and back module)
Power Consumption
Table 81: PT-MADI4O-IBG Power Consumption
Power Consumption 18W
(includes front module and 2 Dual Rx SFPs)
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 175
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
PT-MADI4X-IBG Parameters
Multichannel Audio Digital Interface (MADI) Modules
Note: SFP Parameters are applicable to the Optical module only.
PT-MADI4X-IBG Parameters
Functional Block
General
TDM Locking
Parameter Name
Serial Number
Temperature
Parameter Hysteresis
Software Version
Control FPGA Version R
Processing FPGA Version R
R/W Description
R Displays the module's unique identifier
Options
<String>
R
R
FPGA (V6) temperature
R/W Parameter updated time
<String> in degrees celsius
<Integer>
2000000 us
Embedded software version <String>
Control FPGA design version <String>
<String>
Input Type R
Processing FPGA design version
Input signal media type
Sync Select
GenLock Present
GenLock Locked
GenLock Standard
R/W Sync Source
R
R
R
Indicates the GenLock signal present
Genlock is locked
GenLock Standard
BNC
Optical
Sync1
Sync2
Sync3
No
Yes
No
Yes
Unknown
525i 59.94
625i 50
720p 25
720p 29.97
720p 30
720p 50
720p 59.94
720p 60
1080p 23.98
1080p 24
1080p 29.97
1080p 30
1080p 25
1080i 50
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 176
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Functional Block Parameter Name
Multichannel Audio Digital Interface (MADI) Modules
R/W Description Options
1080i 59.94
1080i 60
MADI Input
MADI Present
(Table Parameter)
MADI Present (1-4)
Number of Channels
(Table Parameter)
Number of Channels (1-
4)
R
Sample Rate
(Table Parameter)
MADI (1-4) Active
Channel
Sample Rate (1-4)
MADI<1-4> 01-16
MADI<1-4> 17-32
MADI<1-4> 33-48
MADI<1-4> 49-64
R
R
R
R
R
Reports the presence of the reference signal
Reports the number of channels in the MADI Input
Sample Rate in kHz
No
Yes
0
32
56
64
Bit map for each active channel
Bit map for each active channel
Bit map for each active channel
Bit map for each active channel
<String>
<String>
<String>
<String>
Mapping
MADI to TDM map
(Table Parameter)
MADI to TDM map (1-4) Indicates how to map MADI signal to TDM
None
32
56
64
SFP
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 177
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Functional Block Parameter Name
Input Optical Power
(Table Parameter)
Input Optical Power <1-
4>
SFP Type
(Table Parameter)
SFP Type <1-2>
Multichannel Audio Digital Interface (MADI) Modules
R/W Description
R
R
Options
Reports Input Optical Power
Too Low
Too High
Unknown
-31 dBm to 1 dBm
Reports type of SFP plugged in
OP+SFP+MADI+
2RX
Unknown
No SFP
MADI Output Module PT-MADI4X-OBG
The PT-MADI4C-OBG / PT-MADI4O-OBG output module is an AES10-2008 (MADI) compliant audio output board that supports two MADI formats: 56 and 64 channels. Audio data is encapsulated into the
MADI transport stream at a sample rate of 48kHz and typically locked to the same Reference as the TDM
Receiver.
The PT-MADI4X-OBG output module can encode up to128 TDM audio channels into up to 4 MADI outputs, with each output capable of up to 64 channels each (or 32 AES stereo pairs) of PCM Audio or non-PCM data, such as Dolby-E or Dolby-D.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 178
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Variants
Multichannel Audio Digital Interface (MADI) Modules
Electrical Back Module
The PT-MADI4C-OBG output module has a built-in electrical back module that provides 4 BNC connectors (there are a total of 8 connectors but the last 4 are unused and covered).
Figure 79: PT-MADI4C-OBG Output Module
Optical Back Module
The PT-MADI4O-OBG Optical (Multi-mode Fiber) SFP Back Module is same one used for the MADI
Optical Input Module; break away tabs determine if the back module is to be used as input or output.
The Back Module hosts the cages for up to four Dual-Rx Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP) Fiber Optic
Modules (Rx or Tx). Only two of the four ‘cages’ will be used. The back module has to be mounted onto the Platinum frame and the Front Module detaches from the Back Module when the Front Module is pulled out from the frame.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 179
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Multichannel Audio Digital Interface (MADI) Modules
The PT-MADI4O-OBG comes pre-fitted with one MADI compliant, Dual-Tx SFP module. See
Specifications (see "PT-MADI4C-OBG Specifications" on page 183) for details.
Figure 80: PT-MADI4O-OBG Output Module
Figure 81: PT-MADI40-OBG Back Module
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 180
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Multichannel Audio Digital Interface (MADI) Modules
Controlling the MADI Output Module through the Controller
You can access and control PT-MADI4x-OBG parameters through the Controller by selecting it in the list of Output Modules and then clicking Open Module.
Reference Locking
Reference locking is controlled by the following parameters:
TDM Reference Source in the TDM Locking category
(options are Sync1, Sync2, or Sync3)
MADI Reference source in the MADI Locking category
(options are Sync1, Sync2, Sync3, or Same as TDM Ref.)
By default, audio encapsulated into the MADI transport stream is locked to the same reference as the
TDM receiver.
Using the TDM reference for MADI (default option)
If you select the same reference for MADI as for TDM ("Same as TDM Ref" option), non-PCM data such as Dolby-E or Dolby-D can also be encapsulated into the MADI transport stream.
Using a separate (non-TDM) reference for MADI
If the reference signal for MADI is different than the one used for TDM locking, channels conveying non-
PCM data (such as Dolby-E/D) are destroyed. Non-PCM data becomes unusable because of a samplerate conversion process that transfers received TDM data into a new clock domain (MADI). As a workaround - for example, when you need to lock the TDM data to a video reference - lock the MADI audio data to an unrelated 48kHz DARS reference.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 181
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
TDM Input
Multichannel Audio Digital Interface (MADI) Modules
The TDM Input section reports on audio presence and format for each of the 128 mono audio channels that can be received by the TDM receiver. Possible Audio formats are PCM, non-PCM, Dolby-E, and
Dolby-D.
TDM Output Mapping
You can map portions of the TDM stream to one or more of the four MADI outputs. The MADI Output
Format section provides mapping options for each of the 4 MADI Outputs. You can map predefined channel ranges in chunks of 56 or 64 channels. The following options are available:
TDM 1-56 (56 channels)
TDM 33-88 (56 channels)
TDM 65-120 (56 channels)
TDM 1-64 (64 channels)
TDM 33-96 (64 channels)
TDM 65-128 (64 channels)
Supported TDM Reference/MADI Reference combinations
TDM
Any of the supported DARS Ref.
Rates
Any of the supported DARS Ref.
Rates
MADI
Same as TDM Ref. (= DARS Ref.)
Any of the supported DARS Ref.
Rates
Any of the supported Video Ref.
Standards
Any of the supported DARS Ref. Rates (can be unrelated and asynchronous to TDM DARS
Ref.)
Any of the supported Video Ref. Standards
Same as TDM Ref. (= Video Ref.)
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 182
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
TDM
Any of the supported Video Ref.
Standards
MADI
Multichannel Audio Digital Interface (MADI) Modules any of the supported DARS Ref. Rates
Note: The use of two different Video Ref. Standards (for example, TDM:525 and MADI:625) is not supported.
Supported DARS Ref. Rates are 192kHz, 96kHz, 48kHz, 32kHz.
Supported Video Ref. Standards are 525, 625, HD tri-level sync (various formats).
Output Specifications
Table 82: Electrical Output Specifications
Item Specification
Number of Outputs
Connector
4
BNC (IEC169-8)
Impedance
Output Level
Link rate
Return Loss
75 Ohm
600mV
125Mbit/s (4B5B encoded, NRZI)
NA
Table 83: Optical Output Specifications
Item Specification
Number of Outputs
Fiber Type
Package
Connector
Center Wavelength
Output Power
4
Multi-mode (works with 50/125um or 62.5/125um cables)
2x Dual Channel Transmitter SFP Modules
LC with PC/UPC polish
1300nm
-19dBm to -12dBm
Distance
Extinction Rate
Link rate
Qualified Devices
Laser Safety up to 2000m
8.2dB (min)
125Mbit/s (4B5B encoded, NRZI)
Optoway SPM-3102W-2TG
Class 1 Laser Product
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 183
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Output Power Consumption
Multichannel Audio Digital Interface (MADI) Modules
PT-MADI4O-OBG Power Consumption
Table 84: PT-MADI4O-OBG Power Consumption
Power Consumption 25W
(includes front module and back module - 2x Dual Tx SFPs)
PT-MADI4C-OBG Power Consumption
Table 85: PT-MADI4C-OBG Power Consumption
Power Consumption 22W
(includes front module and back module)
PT-MADI4X-OBG Parameters
Note: SFP Parameters are applicable to the Optical module only.
Table 86: PT-MADI4X-OBG Parameters
Path
General
Parameter Name
Serial Number (RO)
Description
Displays the module's unique identifier.
Submodule Temperature (RO) Indicates the temperature of the FPGA
TDM Error Enable For in-field diagnostics only
Options
<String>
<String> in
Degrees Celsius
No
Yes
TDM Error count
SFP
TDM Error Count (RO)
Submodule Firmware Version
(RO)
For in-field diagnostics only
Indicates MC software version
Submodule FPGA Version (RO) Indicates FPGA firmware version
Wavelength <1-4>
(Table Parameter)
Reports wavelength of fiber optical output
<String>
<String>
N/A
1300
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 184
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Path Parameter Name
TDM Locking
Multichannel Audio Digital Interface (MADI) Modules
Laser Status <1-4>
(Table Parameter)
Laser Enable <1-4>
(Table Parameter)
SFP Type <1-2>
(Table Parameter)
TDM Reference Source
TDM Reference Present (RO)
TDM Reference Locked (RO)
Description
Reports laser status
Enables or disables fiber optical output
Reports type of SFP plugged in
Selects which physical sync port the module uses for the TDM reference
Reports the presence of the reference signal
Reports the locked status of the reference signal
Sync1
Sync2
Sync3
No
Yes
No
Yes
Options
Enabled
Disabled
N/A
Normal
Failed
Yes
No
OP+SFP+MADI+
2TX
Unknown
NO SFP
TDM Reference Standard (RO) Indicates the reference standard detected on the genlock input.
Reference standards marked with an asterisk can be detected, but they cannot be used in connection with the PT-
MADIxx-OBG, since the output sample rate is always 48kHz.
Unknown
525i 59.94
625i 50
720p 25
720p 29.97
720p 30
720p 50
720p 59.94
720p 60
1080p 23.98
1080p 24
1080p 29.97
1080p 30
1080p 25
1080i 50
1080i 59.94
1080i 60
1080sF 23.98
1080sF 24
DARS 192kHz
DARS 96kHz
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 185
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Path Parameter Name
Multichannel Audio Digital Interface (MADI) Modules
Description Options
DARS 88.2kHz*
DARS 48kHz
DARS 44.1kHz*
DARS 32kHz*
MADI Locking MADI Reference Source
MADI Reference Present (RO)
MADI Reference Locked (RO)
Selects which physical sync port the module uses for the TDM reference
Reports the presence of the reference signal
Reports the locked status of the reference signal
No
Yes
No
Yes
Sync1
Sync2
Sync3
Same as TDM Ref.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 186
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Path Parameter Name
TDM Input
Multichannel Audio Digital Interface (MADI) Modules
Description Options
MADI Reference Standard (RO) Indicates the reference standard detected on the genlock input.
Reference standards marked with an asterisk can be detected, but they cannot be used in connection with the PT-
MADIxx-OBG, since the output sample rate is always 48kHz.
Unknown
525i 59.94
625i 50
720p 25
720p 29.97
720p 30
720p 50
720p 59.94
720p 60
1080p 23.98
1080p 24
1080p 29.97
1080p 30
1080p 25
1080i 50
1080i 59.94
1080i 60
1080sF 23.98
1080sF 24
DARS 192kHz
DARS 96kHz
DARS 88.2kHz*
DARS 48kHz
DARS 44.1kHz*
DARS 32kHz*
TDM Audio Format (x128) (RO)
(Table Parameter)
TDM Audio Present (x128) (RO)
(Table Parameter)
Indicates the format of each of the 128 Audio mono channels received by the TDM Receiver
Indicates the presence of each of the 128 Audio mono channels received by the TDM Receiver
PCM
Non-PCM
Dolby-E
Dolby-D
No
Yes
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 187
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Path Parameter Name
MADI Output MADI Output Format (x4)
Multichannel Audio Digital Interface (MADI) Modules
Description
Selects which portion of the TDM stream gets encapsulated into the
MADI transport stream.
Options
TDM 1 - 56 (56
Channels)
TDM 33- 88 (56
Channels)
TDM 65- 120 (56
Channels)
TDM 1 - 64 (64
Channels)
TDM 33- 96 (64
Channels)
TDM 65 - 128 (64
Channels)
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 188
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Analog/Digital Audio Converter Modules with TDM
Analog/Digital Audio Converter
Modules with TDM
Audio A/D Input Modules with TDM Capability
(PT-ADCT-IB)
Operation
Figure 82: PM-ADCT-IB/PT-ADCT-IB Module
The PM-ADCT-IB/PT-ADCT-IB audio A/D input module provides analog audio to AES digital audio conversion within the Platinum routing system. Two optional builds (one option with High Z inputs, the other with 600
terminated inputs) provide 16 stereo channels of conversion with standard Platinum
I/O module features. This option will provide the user higher conversion capacity (16 stereo channels), made available via Imagine Communications' TDM (Time Division Multiplexing) architecture.
To reduce idle channel noise in systems using A/D and D/A converters, audio level sensing circuitry is included that will mute the output (i.e., set all sample data = 0) when the analog input is lost. The level at which input signal presence is determined is user adjustable, and includes a minimal level which effectively disables the function. The duration for which this minimum amplitude is maintained before muting occurs is also user-defined.
The PM-ADCT-IB/PT-ADCT-IB can automatically detect an external AES reference signal (DARS), to derive the required sampling clocks and generate AES streams that are locked in both frequency and phase to this external reference signal. When this reference signal is absent, the PM-ADCT-IB/PT-ADCT-IB generates the necessary sampling clocks at one of several of the most common AES frame rates. Users will have the ability to adjust these internally generated sampling clock frequencies within a specified tolerance.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 189
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Analog/Digital Audio Converter Modules with TDM
Back Panel I/O Module for PM-ADCT-IB/PT-ADCT-IB
The PT-A2-BP back panel I/O module corresponds to the PM-ADCT-IB and PT-ADCT-IB modules. DB-44 connectors are used on the PT-A2-BP. The optional PT-A2-DTB terminal block adapter is available to accommodate wiring of individual signals to the frame.
Figure 83: PT-A2-DTB Terminal Block Adapter
Analog Inputs
The PM-ADCT-IB/PT-ADCT-IB provides 16 dual channel balanced analog audio inputs via the PT-A2-BP back module. The standard option provides high impedance inputs; optional 600
terminated inputs are also available. Input signals are received by high-quality, audio line receivers containing internal laser-trimmed, matched resistors for maximum common mode rejection. The signals are converted from balanced to single-ended by the receivers, and are then attenuated and AC-coupled to the second stage attenuators.
Digitally controlled audio attenuators provide users with the ability to set digital full scale to a variety of analog audio levels. These low-noise, low distortion attenuators can be software controlled to provide a wide range of full scale settings.
The output signals from the second stage are then buffered and converted to differential signals in preparation for presentation to the converters, along with a gain adjustment to compensate for the first stage attenuation required prior to the digital attenuators.
The final analog stage provides low-pass filtering and the addition of a DC offset before presenting the audio signal to the A/D converter.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 190
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
A/D Conversion
Analog/Digital Audio Converter Modules with TDM
Analog-to-digital conversion is provided by quad channel 24-bit oversampling delta-sigma converters supporting sampling frequencies up to 192 kHz. These converters provide DC bias voltage outputs, digital decimation and high pass filtering, and audio input clipping detection.
AES Outputs
The FPGA receives the audio samples from the converters where they are formatted into AES data streams. The FPGA inserts channel status, parity, and CRC bits, and then encodes the data into biphase
AES signals. Two copies of the first eight AES signals are provided as AC coupled LVDS for distribution to the wideband Platinum crosspoints. The FPGA also provides a TDM version of all sixteen AES signals for distribution to the audio-specific crosspoint module(s).
Reporting
Each channel will provide standard reporting of signal presence using card-edge mounted LEDs.
The green signal presence LEDs, labeled "Input 1" to "Input 16," are located in a row on the front of the input module. Each of these LEDs illuminates when a signal is detected on its corresponding input.
The red signal clipping LEDs, labeled "Input 1" to "Input 16," are located in a row on the front of the input module. Each of these LEDs illuminates when a signal on the input exceeds the maximum input amplitude or level adjust available through TDM scales the digital signal beyond AES limits.
In addition, the usual three system LEDs are included.
Operating Modes
The PM-ADCT-IB/PT-ADCT-IB operates in one of three modes: External, internal, and auto mode:.
In external mode, all necessary sampling clocks are derived from an external AES reference (DARS).
The resulting AES streams generated from the sampled analog audio inputs will be locked in both frequency and phase to this external reference.
In internal mode, all necessary sampling clocks are derived from internal oscillators. These oscillators have been chosen to provide for many of the most common AES frame rates (32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 88.2 kHz, 96 kHz, and 192 kHz). Voltage-controlled crystal oscillators, or VCXOs, allow adjustment of these internally generated sampling clocks within a specified tolerance.
In auto mode, the PM-ADCT-IB/PT-ADCT-IB detects whether a usable external reference is present or not. If it is able to lock to the reference, it will operate as described in External mode; however, if the reference is lost or becomes unusable, the PM-ADCT-IB/PT-ADCT-IB will automatically switch over to operate as described in Internal Mode. If the reference is restored, the board will again automatically switch over to operate as described in External Mode.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 191
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Analog Level Detection
Analog/Digital Audio Converter Modules with TDM
Analog input level detection is provided in two forms:
The first implementation is through the use of rectifier and comparator circuits that are used to detect a user-defined minimum signal amplitude. This minimum amplitude is conveyed via a nonvolatile, digitally controlled potentiometer that provides the reference voltage to the comparators. (The reference voltage can be individually set for channels A and B on all inputs.) If the amplitude of the input signal exceeds the comparator reference voltage, the green LED for that channel is illuminated.
If the signal level falls below the minimum threshold for a user-defined time duration, the sampled data output from the A/D converter will be overwritten by all zeroes within the FPGA. This greatly reduces idle channel noise in systems using A/D and D/A converters. Conversely, the detection of a signal above the minimum threshold value also has an associated time duration before muting is released, providing hysteresis to this function.
The second implementation of analog level detection is performed in the A/D converter. When the analog level exceeds the digital full-scale capability of the converter, the red Clipping LED for that channel is illuminated, and the condition is reported to the control system. The user has the option of defining whether this condition constitutes an alarm.
Installation
All input modules and back panels are installed at our manufacturing facility. If you need to purchase additional components, please contact your dealer or our Sales Department.
Control
This Module’s parameters can be enabled and/or changed via CCS Navigator or the Platinum IP3
Controller.
Controllable Parameters
Table 87: PT-ADCT-IB User-Controllable Parameters
Parameter
Module External Reference Frequency
[RO]
Description
Reports external reference frequency
(NOTE: Must be a sample rate supported by TDM)
Ext. Reference CRC Error Reports CRC error on external
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential.
Options
Unlocked
Out of Range
192 kHz
96 kHz
88.2 kHz
48 kHz
44.1 kHz
32 kHz
No
February 2015 | Page 192
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Parameter
Analog/Digital Audio Converter Modules with TDM
Description
reference
Options
Yes
Ext. Reference Lock Error
Ext. Reference Validity Error
Ext. Reference Confidence
Error
Ext. Reference Biphase Error
Ext. Reference Parity Error
Bypass (1-16)
(Table Parameter)
Operating Mode
0dBFS setting
Presence Hysteresis (1-16)
Silence Delay (1-16)
Silence Disable (1-8)
Threshold (1-8)
Sample Frequency Adjust
Sampling Frequency Select
Reports lock error on external reference
Reports validity error on external reference
Reports confidence error on external reference
Reports biphase error on external reference
Reports parity error on external reference
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No bypass
Ignore signal presence
For signals routed to wideband crosspoint only - tells control to make switch regardless of signal presence
Sets PM-ADCT-IB/PT-ADCT-IB operating mode
Sets 0 dBFS setting for analog to digital conversion
Sets the time duration between acquisition of signal presence and release of audio muting
Auto mode
Internal mode
External mode
13 dB to 28 dB in 1 dB increments
7.5 ms to 32.76 s in 500 ns steps
Sets time duration between loss of signal presence and audio muting
7.5 ms to 32.76 s in 500 ns steps
Disables feature of generating AES silence when signal is not present
(wideband mode only)
No
Yes
Sets signal presence threshold (all inputs)
0x00 to 0x7F
Adjusts internal mode sampling frequency
0x00 to 0xFF
Sets the sampling frequency when in internal mode
32 kHz
44.1 kHz
48 kHz
88.2 kHz
96k Hz
192 kHz
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 193
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
In
Parameter
Audio Reference
Parameter Hysteresis
Sync Select
Crosspoint Type
Level Adjust (1-32)
Signal Presence (1-16) [RO]
Ch. A Presence (1-16)
Ch. B Presence (1-16)
Phase Alarm (1-16) [RO]
Clip Detect (1-32) [RO]
Polarity Reversal (1-32)
Tone
Analog/Digital Audio Converter Modules with TDM
Description Options
Selects AES reference input for source
Sets hysteresis for parameters needing it
Determines crosspoint matrix requirement
Sync 4
Sync 3
Sync 2
Sync 1
0 to 5 seconds in 500 ns steps
Sync 4
Sync 3
Sync 2
Sync 1
TDM XPT
Wideband
Both TDM and wideband
Undefined
Indicates gain/attenuation applied to mono channel
Reports presence or absence of valid signal (determined by signal presence threshold, signal absence before mute, signal presence before mute release, and tone generation)
10dB to -30dB in 0.5dB increments
Signal absent
Signal present
Reports absence or presence of a signal on Channel A
Reports absence or presence of a signal on Channel B
Alarm set if left and right channels are out of phase
Reports if signal on the input exceeds the maximum input amplitude
Absent
Present
Absent
Present
No phase error
Phase error
Signal OK
Signal clipping
Reverses + and - to correct audio polarity in the analog domain
Indicates type of tone to send out
AES output
Normal polarity
Invert polarity
Pass input
Silence
500Hz
1K
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 194
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Parameter
Swap/Copy (1-16)
Summing (1-16)
Analog/Digital Audio Converter Modules with TDM
Description
Swap/Copy left and right audio channels
(NOTE: This parameter is always applied after summing)
Add left and right audio samples, and then divide by 2
(NOTE: This parameter is always applied before swap/copy)
Options
No swap
Swap left and right
Copy left to right
Copy right to left
No summing
Right to left
Left to right
Both
Figure 84: PT-ADCT Parameters
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 195
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Functional Block Diagram
Analog/Digital Audio Converter Modules with TDM
Figure 85: PM-ADCT-IB/PT-ADCT-IB Functional Block Diagram
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 196
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Pinout Diagram
Table 88: PT-ADCT-IB Pinout Information
Analog/Digital Audio Converter Modules with TDM
Inputs
1 – 4
1A+
1A-
DB-44
Pin No.
15
30
1A Gnd 44
1B+
1B-
43
28
1B Gnd 42
2A+ 14
2A- 13
2A Gnd 29
2B+ 41
2B- 26
2B Gnd 40
3A+
3A-
12
11
3A Gnd 27
3B+ 24
3B-
3B, 4A
Gnd
4A+
39
25
10
4A- 9
4B+
4B-
23
38
4B Gnd 37
Inputs
5 – 8
5A+
5A-
5A, 6A
Gnd
5B+
5B-
5B Gnd 35
6A+ 6
6A-
6B+
6B-
5
34
19
6B, 7A
Gnd
7A+
36
21
20
4
DB-44
Pin No.
8
7
22
7A-
7B+
3
32
7B- 17
7B Gnd 33
8A+
8A-
1
2
8A, 8B
Gnd
8B+
8B-
18
31
16
Inputs
9 – 12
9A+
9A-
DB-44 Pin
No.
15
30
9A Gnd 44
Inputs
13 – 16
13A+
13A-
13A, 14A
Gnd
9B+
9B-
43
28
13B+
13B-
9B Gnd 42
10A+
10A-
10B+
10B-
10B Gnd
14
13
10A Gnd 29
41
26
40
13B Gnd 35
14A+ 6
14A-
14B+
14B-
5
34
19
14B, 15A
Gnd
15A+
36
21
20
4
DB-44
Pin No.
8
7
22
11A+
11A-
12
11
11A Gnd 27
11B+ 24
11B-
11B, 12A
Gnd
12A+
39
25
10
12A- 9
12B+
12B-
23
38
12B Gnd 37
15A-
15B+
15B- 17
15B Gnd 33
16A+
16A-
16A, 16B
Gnd
16B+
16B-
1
2
3
32
18
31
16
Specifications
Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice.
Note: Unless otherwise noted, all specifications are measured using a 48 kHz sampling rate
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 197
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Item
Number of inputs
Input type
Input connector
Impedance
Signal type
Maximum input amplitude
Full scale adjustment range
CMRR
Conversion type
Resolution
Sampling rates
Gain stability
Frequency response
Linearity deviation
THD+N
Idle channel noise
Dynamic range
Crosstalk
Analog/Digital Audio Converter Modules with TDM
Specification
16
Balanced
DB-44
> 20k
Stereo analog audio
+28 dBu
0 dBFS = +13 dBu to +28 dBu in
1 dB steps, ± 0.5 dB
> 75dB rejection @ 60Hz
128x oversampling, 1-bit, delta-sigma
24 bits
32 kHz – 192 kHz using external AES reference
32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 88.2 kHz, 96 kHz, or 192 kHz using internal oscillators
± 0.01 dB
± 0.15 dB, 20 Hz to 20 kHz
< ± 0.5 dB typical
< ± 1.0 dB worst case
< 0.01% @ 997 Hz, –1 dBFS = +23 dBu
< –100 dBFS CCIR-RMS, typical
< –90 dBFS CCIR-RMS, worst case
> 100 dB CCIR-RMS, typical
> 90 dB CCIR-RMS, worst case
> 90 dB isolation, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, all hostile
(hostile channels driven at
–1 dBFS = +23 dBu)
Table 89: PT-ADCT-IB Analog to Digital Audio Input – 600W Version
Note: Unless otherwise noted, all specifications are measured using a 48 kHz sampling rate
Item
Number of inputs
Input type
Input connector
Impedance
Signal type
Specification
16
Balanced
DB-44
600
Stereo analog audio
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 198
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Item
Maximum input amplitude
Full scale adjustment range
CMRR
Conversion type
Resolution
Sampling rates
Gain stability
Frequency response
Linearity deviation
THD+N
Idle channel noise
Dynamic range
Crosstalk
Power Consumption
Table 90: PT-ADCT-IB Power Consumption
Power Consumption 24.7W
Analog/Digital Audio Converter Modules with TDM
Specification
+22 dBm
0 dBFS = +7 dBm to +22 dBm in
1 dB steps, ± 0.5 dB
> 60 dB rejection @ 60Hz
128x oversampling, 1-bit, delta-sigma
24 bits
32 kHz – 192 kHz using external AES reference
32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 88.2 kHz, 96 kHz, or 192 kHz using internal oscillators
± 0.01 dB
± 0.15 dB, 20 Hz to 20 kHz
< ± 0.5 dB typical
< ± 1.0 dB worst case
< 0.01% @ 997 Hz, –1 dBFS = +17 dBm
< –100 dBFS CCIR-RMS, typical
< –90 dBFS CCIR-RMS, worst case
> 100 dB CCIR-RMS typical
> 90 dB CCIR-RMS worst case
> 90 dB isolation, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, all hostile
(hostile channels driven at
–1 dBFS = +17 dBm)
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 199
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Analog/Digital Audio Converter Modules with TDM
AES to Analog Audio Converter Output
Modules with TDM Capability (PT-DACT-OB)
Operation
Figure 86: PT-DACT-OB Module
The PT-DACT-OB audio D/A output module provides the platform for AES digital to analog audio conversion within the Platinum routing system. The TDM option provides 16 channels of conversion with enhanced Platinum I/O module features. The PT-DACT-OB provides greater conversion capacity, made available via Time Division Multiplexing (TDM).
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 200
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Back Panel I/O Module for PT-DACT-OB
Analog/Digital Audio Converter Modules with TDM
The PT-A2-BP back panel I/O module corresponds to the PT-DACT-OB module. DB-44 connectors are used on the PT-A2-BP. The optional PT-A2-DTB terminal block adapter is available to accommodate wiring of individual signals to the frame.
Figure 87: PT-A2-DTB Terminal Block Adapter
Installation
All output modules and back panel modules are installed at our manufacturing facility. See Installing
Input and Output Modules on page 363 for the procedure for field expansion or replacement of output modules. If you need to purchase additional components, please contact your dealer or our Sales
Department.
Control
This Module’s parameters can be enabled and/or changed via CCS Navigator or the Platinum IP3
Controller.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 201
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Controllable Parameters
Analog/Digital Audio Converter Modules with TDM
Table 91: PT-DACT-OB User-Controllable Parameters List
Parameter
Out Tone (1-16)
(Table Parameter)
Polarity Reversal (1-32)
(Table Parameter)
Crosspoint Type
Description
Indicates type of tone to send out AES output
Reverses + and - to correct audio polarity in the analog domain
Determines crosspoint matrix requirement
Options
Pass input
Silence
500Hz
1K
Normal polarity
Invert polarity
Reports if data is re-locked by reclocking stage
Alarm set if right and left channels are out of phase
TDM XPT
Wideband
Not locked
Locked
No phase error
Phase error
Lock Detect (1-16) [RO]
(Table Parameter)
Phase Alarm (1-16)
(Table Parameter)
Clip Detect (1-16) [RO]
(Table Parameter)
Audio Mute (1-16)
(Table Parameter)
Swap/Copy (1-16)
(Table Parameter)
Level Adjust (1-32)
(Table Parameter)
Summing (1-16)
(Table Parameter)
Reports if signal on the input exceeds the maximum input amplitude
Swap/Copy left and right audio channels
(NOTE: This parameter is always applied after summing)
Indicates gain/attenuation applied to mono channel
Add left and right audio samples, divide by 2
(NOTE: This parameter is always applied before swap/copy)
Sets mute for any data passing reclocking stage
Muted
Unmuted
Copy right to left
1 0dB to -30 dB in 0.5 dB increments
Signal OK
Signal clipping
No swap
Swap left and right
Copy left to right
No summing
Right to left
Left to right
Both
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 202
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Parameter
Transition (1-16)
(Table Parameter)
Duration (1-16)
(Table Parameter)
Module Audio Reference
Parameter Hysteresis
Sync Select
0dBFS Setting
Analog/Digital Audio Converter Modules with TDM
Description Options
Determines type of transition on a given destination
Selects AES reference input for source
Quiet switch
V-fade
Fade/cut
Cut/fade
Synchronous switch
Determines transition length
No duration
Shortest
Short
Medium short
Medium
Medium long
Long
Longest
Sync 4
Sync 3
Sync 2
Sync 1
0 to 5 seconds in 500 ns steps Sets hysteresis for parameters needing it
Selects one of the four sync inputs as the external reference
Sets 0 dBFS level for digital to analog conversion
Sync 4
Sync 3
Sync 2
Sync 1
13 dB to 28 dB in 1 dB increments
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 203
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Analog/Digital Audio Converter Modules with TDM
Figure 88: PT-DACT-OB Parameters
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 204
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Functional Block Diagram
Analog/Digital Audio Converter Modules with TDM
Figure 89: PM-DACT-OB/PT-DACT-OB Functional Block Diagram
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 205
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Pinout Diagram
Table 92: PT-DACT-OB Pinout Information
Analog/Digital Audio Converter Modules with TDM
Outputs 1
– 4
1A+
DB-44 Pin
No.
15
1A- 30
1A Gnd 44
1B+
1B-
1B Gnd
2A+
2A-
2A Gnd 29
2B+
2B-
2B Gnd
3A+
3A-
3A Gnd 27
3B+ 24
3B-
3B, 4A
Gnd
4A+
4A-
4B+
43
28
42
14
13
41
26
40
12
11
39
25
10
9
23
4B- 38
4B Gnd 37
Outputs 5
– 8
5A+
5A-
5A, 6A
Gnd
5B+
5B-
5B Gnd 35
6A+ 6
6A-
6B+
6B-
7
22
36
21
5
34
19
20 6B, 7A
Gnd
7A+
7A-
7B+
4
3
32
DB-44 Pin
No.
8
7B- 17
7B Gnd 33
8A+
8A-
1
2
8A, 8B
Gnd
8B+
8B-
18
31
16
Outputs 9
– 12
9A+
DB-44 Pin
No.
15
9A- 30
9A Gnd 44
9B+
9B-
43
28
9B Gnd 42
10A+ 14
10A- 13
10A Gnd 29
10B+
10B-
41
26
10B Gnd 40
11A+
11A-
12
11A Gnd 27
11B+ 24
11B- 39
11B, 12A
Gnd
25
12A+ 10
12A-
12B+
12B-
11
9
23
38
12B Gnd 37
Outputs 13
– 16
DB-44 Pin
No.
13A+ 8
13A- 7
13A, 14A
Gnd
22
13B+
13B-
36
21
13B Gnd 35
14A+ 6
14A-
14B+
14B-
14B, 15A
Gnd
20
15A+ 4
15A-
15B+
3
32
5
34
19
15B- 17
15B Gnd 33
16A+
16A-
1
2
16A, 16B
Gnd
18
16B+
16B-
31
16
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 206
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Analog/Digital Audio Converter Modules with TDM
Specifications
Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice.
Table 93: PT-DACT-OB Digital to Analog Audio Output – Standard Version
Item
Number of outputs
Output type
Specification
16
Balanced
Output connector
Impedance
Signal type
Maximum output amplitude
Full scale adjustment range
DB-44
66
Stereo analog audio
+28 dBu
DC offset
Conversion type
Resolution
AES frame rates
Gain stability
Frequency response
Linearity deviation
THD+N
0 dBFS = +13 dBu to +28 dBu in 1 dB steps, ± 0.5 dB
0V ± 0.05V
128x oversampling, fifth-order, deltasigma
24 bits
32 kHz – 192 kHz
± 0.01 dB
± 0.25 dB, 20 Hz to 20 kHz
< ±0.5 dB
Idle channel noise
Dynamic range
Crosstalk
< 0.01% @ 997 Hz,
-1 dBFS = +23 dBu
< -100 dBFS CCIR-RMS
> 100 dB CCIR-RMS
> 90 dB isolation, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, all hostile, typical (hostile channels driven at
–1 dBFS = +23 dBu)
Table 94: PT-DACT-OB Digital to Analog Audio Output – 600W Version
Item Specification
Number of outputs
Output type
16
Balanced
Output connector
Impedance
Signal type
DB-44
600
Stereo analog audio
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 207
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Maximum output amplitude
Full scale adjustment range
DC offset
Conversion type
Resolution
AES frame rates
Gain stability
Frequency response
Linearity deviation
THD+N
Idle channel noise
Dynamic range
Crosstalk
Power Consumption
Table 95: PT-DACT-OB Power Consumption
Power Consumption 14.7W
Analog/Digital Audio Converter Modules with TDM
+22 dBm
0 dBFS = +7 dBm to +22 dBm in 1 dB steps, ± 0.5 dB
0 V ± 0.05 V
128x oversampling, fifth-order, deltasigma
24 bits
32 kHz – 192 kHz
± 0.01 dB
± 0.25 dB, 20 Hz to 20 kHz
< ± 0.5 dB
< 0.01% @ 997 Hz,
-1 dBFS = +17 dBm
< -100 dBFS CCIR-RMS
> 100 dB CCIR-RMS
> 90 dB isolation, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, all hostile, typical (hostile channels driven at
–1 dBFS = +17 dBm)
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 208
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual AES Balanced/Coaxial Modules with TDM Capability
AES Balanced/Coaxial Modules with
TDM Capability
AES Balanced/Coaxial Input Modules with
TDM Capability (PT-AEBT-IB/PT-AECT-IB)
Operation
Figure 90: PT-AEBT-IB Module
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 209
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual AES Balanced/Coaxial Modules with TDM Capability
Figure 91: PT-AECT-IB Module
The AES input front module with TDM capability receives AES3 inputs with amplitude not exceeding 2 V from 2 Mb/s to 25 Mb/s terminated with 75
with the coaxial back module installed, with amplitude not exceeding 7 V from 2 Mb/s to 25 Mb/s terminated with 110
with the balanced back module installed. The front module recovers, reslices, and amplifies the signal before distributing it to the router’s matrices. This module provides a TDM version of all input signals to be distributed to the audiospecific crosspoint module or, optionally, it can pass the first eight AES inputs to the wideband crosspoint. It allows for the connection of 16 channels of AES digital audio using either a balanced or unbalanced coaxial back module, routed within the Platinum platform. Using the optional 8- or 16channel 110
balanced back module (PT-AEB-IBP), or 8- or 16-channel 75
coaxial unbalanced back module (PT-AEC-IBP), the AES input front module with TDM will accept up to 16 AES digital audio signals. Each of the inputs is presented to separate input buffers, which perform the basic signal recovery and internal conversion to balanced low voltage differential signals (LVDS) for use in the FPGAbased signal presence detection and router distribution circuitry.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 210
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual AES Balanced/Coaxial Modules with TDM Capability
Back Panel I/O Module for PT-AEBT-IB/PT-AECT-IB
The PT-AEB-IBP back panel I/O module corresponds to the PT-AEBT-IB input modules. The PT-AEC-IBP back panel I/O module corresponds to the PT-AECT-IB input modules. DB-25 connectors are used on both the PT-AEB-IBP and PT-AEC-IBP back panel I/O modules. To provide the required BNC interface, the PT-AEC-BOC must be used in conjunction with the PT-AEC-IBP for connection to coaxial cables.
Figure 92: PT-AEC-BOC Cables
Installation
Input Module Installation
All input modules are installed at our manufacturing facility. If you need to purchase additional components, please contact your dealer or our Sales Department.
Back Panel I/O Module Installation
All back panel modules are installed at our manufacturing facility. If you need to purchase additional components, please contact your dealer or our Sales Department.
Control
This Module’s parameters can be enabled and/or changed via CCS Navigator or the IP3 Controller.
Controllable Parameters
Table 96: PT-AEBT-IB/PT-AECT-IB User-Controllable Parameters List
[RO] = Read-only parameter
Parameter Description Options
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 211
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
In
Parameter
Module Back Module Type
Audio Reference
Board Level Hysteresis
Sync Select
Tone (1-16)
(Table Parameter)
Polarity Reversal (1-32)
(Table Parameter)
SRC
(Table Parameter)
Signal Presence (1-16) [RO]
(Table Parameter)
Phase Alarm (1-16) [RO]
(Table Parameter)
Clip Detect (1-32) [RO]
(Table Parameter)
Bypass (1-16)
(Table Parameter)
Swap/Copy (1-16)
(Table Parameter)
AES Balanced/Coaxial Modules with TDM Capability
Description Options
Displays the back module type connected to the PT-AEBT-IB or PT-AECT-IB module
Selects AES reference input for source
PT-AEBT-BMI
PT-AECT-BMI
PT-AEB-BMI
PT-AEC-BMI
Sync 4
Sync 3
Sync 2
Sync 1
Sets hysteresis for parameters needing it
0 to 5 seconds in 500 ns steps
Selects which physical sync port the module uses as a reference
Indicates type of tone to send out AES output
Sync 1
Sync 2
Sync 3
Sync 4
Pass input
Silence
500 Hz
1 K
Normal polarity
Invert polarity
Reverses + and - to correct audio polarity in the analog domain
Enables SRC, if licensed
Reports presence or absence of valid signal
No
Yes
Signal absent
Signal present
Alarm set if left and right channels are out of phase
Reports if signal on the input exceeds the maximum input amplitude
No phase error
Phase error
Signal OK
Signal clipping
For signals routed to wideband xpt only - tells control to make switch regardless of signal presence
On
Off
Swap/Copy left and right audio channels
(NOTE: This parameter is always applied after summing)
No swap
Swap left and right
Copy left to right
Copy right to left
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 212
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Parameter
Level Adjust (1-32)
(Table Parameter)
Summing (1-16)
(Table Parameter)
Out Crosspoint Type
AES Balanced/Coaxial Modules with TDM Capability
Description
Indicates gain/attenuation applied to mono channel
Add left and right audio samples, divide by 2
(NOTE: This parameter is always applied before swap/copy)
Determines crosspoint matrix requirement
Options
10 dB to -30 dB in 0.5 dB increments
No summing
Right to left
Left to right
Both
TDM XPT
Wideband
Both TDM and wideband
Undefined
Figure 93: PT-AEST-IB Parameters
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 213
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Functional Block Diagram
AES Balanced/Coaxial Modules with TDM Capability
Figure 94: PM-AEBT-IB/PT-AEBT-IB/PM-AECT-IB/PT-AECT-IB Functional Block Diagram
Pinout Diagram
Table 97: PM-AEBT-IB/PT-AEBT-IB Pinout Information
J2 (Inputs 1 – 8)
1+
1-
1 Gnd
2+
DB-25
Pin No.
13
12
25
24
J1 (Inputs 9 – 16)
9+
9-
9 Gnd
10+
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential.
DB-25
Pin No.
13
12
25
24
February 2015 | Page 214
5+
5-
5 Gnd
6+
6-
6 Gnd
7+
7-
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
2- 23
2 Gnd 11
3+
3-
3 Gnd
4+
4-
4 Gnd
10
9
22
21
20
8
7 Gnd
8+
8-
8 Gnd
Spare Gnd
16
15
14
2
1
4
3
17
5
7
6
19
18
4
3
17
5
7
6
19
18
16
15
14
2
1
22
21
20
8
23
11
10
9
13+
13-
13 Gnd
14+
14-
14 Gnd
15+
15-
10-
10 Gnd
11+
11-
11 Gnd
12+
12-
12 Gnd
15 Gnd
16+
16-
16 Gnd
Spare Gnd
AES Balanced/Coaxial Modules with TDM Capability
Specifications
AES Balanced Digital Audio
Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice.
Table 98: PT-AEBT-IB with PT-AEB-IBP for AES Balanced Digital Audio Inputs
Item Specification
Number of inputs 16
Input type
Input connector
Impedance
Balanced, transformer coupled
DB-25
110
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 215
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Item
Signal type
AES Balanced/Coaxial Modules with TDM Capability
Specification
AES3
AES frame rates 32 kHz to 192 kHz
Other 40% - 60% duty cycle digital signals from 2 Mb/s to 25 Mb/s
0.2 Vpp – 7 Vp-p
5 Vp-p ± 1 V
Input amplitude
Nominal input amplitude
AES Coaxial Digital Audio
Table 99: PT-AECT-IB with PT-AEC-IBP for AES Coaxial Digital Audio Inputs
Item
Number of inputs
Input type
Specification
16
Input connector
Impedance
Signal type
Input amplitude
Nominal input amplitude
AC coupled
75
BNC per IEC 169-8 (via adapter)
75
AES3id, SMPTE 276M
AES frame rates from 32 kHz to 192 kHz
Other 40% - 60% duty cycle digital signals
2 Mb/s to 25 Mb/s
0.1Vp-p to 2Vp-p
Return loss
1.0Vp-p ± 10%
> 30 dB, 0.1 MHz to 6 MHz
> 25 dB, 6 MHz to 12 MHz
Power Consumption
Table 100: PT-AECT-IB/PT-AEBT-IB Power Consumption
Power Consumption 2.4W
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 216
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual AES Balanced/Coaxial Modules with TDM Capability
AES Balanced/Coaxial Output Modules with
TDM Capability (PT-AEBT-OB/PT-AECT-OB)
Operation
Figure 95: PT-AEBT-OB Module
Figure 96: PT-AECT-OB Module
The AES TDM output module allows for the connection of 16 output channels of AES digital audio, using either a balanced or coaxial back module within the Platinum platform, and supports Time Division
Multiplexed (TDM) AES routing.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 217
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual AES Balanced/Coaxial Modules with TDM Capability
Audio processing functions, as well as signal level conversion and presence detection, are handled within an FPGA-based circuit. The 16-channel TDM output module uses only one high speed LVDS signal to receive the various AES signals for presentation at the outputs.
The AES TDM output module also provides output presence detection and true output monitoring on each of the 16 channels.
Back Panel I/O Module for PT-AEBT-OB/PT-AECT-OB
The PT-AEB-OBP back panel I/O module corresponds to the PT-AEBT-OB output module. The PT-AEC-
OBP back panel I/O module corresponds to the PT-AECT-OB output module. DB-25 connectors are used on the PT-AEB-OBP and PT-AEC-OBP back panel I/O modules. To provide the required BNC interface, the PT-AEC-BOC must be used in conjunction with the PT-AEC-OBP for connection to coaxial cables.
Figure 97: PT-AEC-BOC Cables
Installation
Output Module Installation
All output modules are installed at our manufacturing facility. If you need to purchase additional components, please contact your dealer or our Sales Department.
Back Panel I/O Module Installation
All back panel modules are installed at our manufacturing facility. If you need to purchase additional components, please contact your dealer or our Sales Department.
Control
This Module’s parameters can be enabled and/or changed via CCS Navigator or the IP3 Controller.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 218
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Controllable Parameters
AES Balanced/Coaxial Modules with TDM Capability
PT-AEBT-OB/PT-AECT-OB User-Controllable Parameters List
[RO] = Read-only parameter
Module Back Module Type
Out
Parameter
Audio Reference
Parameter Hysteresis
Sync Select
Tone (1-16)
Polarity Reversal (1-32)
Crosspoint Type
Disconnect State
Lock Detect (1-16) [RO]
(Table Parameter)
Phase Alarm (1-16)
(Table Parameter)
Clip Detect (1-32) [RO]
(Table Parameter)
Audio Mute (1-16)
(Table Parameter)
Description Options
Reports coax or balanced back module
Selects AES reference input for source
PT-AEBT-BMO
PT-AECT-BMO
PT-AEB-BMO
PT-AEC-BMO
Sync 4
Sync 3
Sync 2
Sync 1
Sets hysteresis for parameters needing it
Sets mute for any data passing reclocking stage
0 to 5 seconds in 500 ns steps
Selects which physical sync port the module uses as a reference
Indicates type of tone to send out AES output
Sync1
Sync2
Sync3
Sync4
Pass input
Silence
500 Hz
1 K
Normal polarity
Invert polarity
Reverses + and - to correct audio polarity in the analog domain
Determines crosspoint matrix requirement
Reports if data is re-locked by reclocking stage
TDM
Wideband
Select whether to transmit AES silence or a DC level when signal presence is lost
Silence
DC
Not locked
Locked
Alarm set if right and left channels are out of phase
Reports if signal on the input exceeds the maximum input amplitude
No phase error
Phase error
Signal OK
Signal clipping
Muted
Unmuted
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 219
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Parameter
Swap/Copy (1-16)
(Table Parameter)
Level Adjust (1-32)
(Table Parameter)
Summing (1-16)
(Table Parameter)
Transition (1-16)
(Table Parameter)
Duration (1-16)
(Table Parameter)
AES Balanced/Coaxial Modules with TDM Capability
Description Options
Swap/Copy left and right audio channels
(NOTE: This parameter is always applied after summing)
No swap
Swap left and right
Copy left to right
Copy right to left
Indicates gain/attenuation applied to mono channel
1 0dB to -30 dB in 0.5 dB increments
Add left and right audio samples, divide by 2
(NOTE: This parameter is always applied before swap/copy)
No summing
Right to left
Left to right
Both
Determines type of transition on a given destination
Quiet switch
V-fade
Fade/cut
Cut/fade
Synchronous switch
Determines transition length
No duration
Shortest
Short
Medium short
Medium
Medium long
Long
Longest
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 220
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual AES Balanced/Coaxial Modules with TDM Capability
Figure 98: PT-AEST-OB Parameters
Functional Block Diagram
Input 5A
Input 5B
Input 5C
Input 5D
Input 6A
Input 6B
Input 6C
Input 6D
Input 7A
Input 7B
Input 7C
Input 7D
Input 8A
Input 8B
Input 8C
Input 8D
Input 1A
Input 1B
Input 1C
Input 1D
Input 2A
Input 2B
Input 2C
Input 2D
Input 3A
Input 3B
Input 3C
Input 3D
Input 4A
Input 4B
Input 4C
Input 4D
FPGA-based signal presence detection and internal distribution
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
TDM input
AES output 1
Monitor 1
AES output 2
Monitor 2
AES output 3
Monitor 3
AES output 16
Monitor 16
Internal control bus
+24VA in from frame
+24VB in from frame
+5VL in from frame
On-board supply
+5V
+3.3V
+2.5V
+1.2V
Card status and signal presence
LEDs
Back module
ID signals
Control logic
Figure 99: PT-AEBT-OB/PT-AECT-OB Functional Block Diagram
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential.
PIPE
PRTI
February 2015 | Page 221
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual AES Balanced/Coaxial Modules with TDM Capability
5-
5 Gnd
6+
6-
6 Gnd
7+
7-
7 Gnd
8+
8-
8 Gnd
Spare Gnd
2 Gnd
3+
3-
3 Gnd
4+
4-
4 Gnd
5+
1+
13
1S
25
1-
12
2+
24
2S
11
2-
23
3+
10
3S
22
3-
9
4+
21
4S
8
4-
20
5+
7
5S
19
5-
6
6+
18
6S
5
6-
17
7+
4
7S
16
7-
3
8+
15
8S
2
Spare
1
8-
14
J2 (Outputs 1 – 8)
1+
1-
1 Gnd
2+
2-
DB-25
Pin No.
13
12
25
24
23
8
7
21
20
11
10
9
22
5
4
3
16
6
19
18
17
2
1
15
14
Pinout Diagram
PM-AEBT-OB/PT-AEBT-OB Pinout Information
13-
13 Gnd
14+
14-
14 Gnd
15+
15-
15 Gnd
16+
16-
16 Gnd
Spare Gnd
10 Gnd
11+
11-
11 Gnd
12+
12-
12 Gnd
13+
1+
13
1S
25
1-
12
2+
24
2S
11
2-
23
3+
10
3S
22
3-
9
4+
21
4S
8
4-
20
5+
7
5S
19
5-
6
6+
18
6S
5
6-
17
7+
4
7S
16
7-
3
8+
15
8S
2
Spare
1
8-
14
J1 (Outputs 9 – 16)
9+
9-
9 Gnd
10+
10-
DB-25
Pin No.
13
12
25
24
23
8
7
21
20
11
10
9
22
5
4
3
16
6
19
18
17
2
1
15
14
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 222
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Specifications
AES Balanced/Coaxial Modules with TDM Capability
Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice.
Table 101: PT-AEBT-OB AES Specifications
Item Specification
Number of outputs 16
Output type
Output connector
Balanced, transformer coupled
Impedance
Signal type
Jitter
Output amplitude
DC offset
Rise/fall times
Propagation delay
DB-25
110
AES3
AES frame rates from 32 kHz to 192 kHz
Other 40% – 60% duty cycle digital signals from 2 Mb/s to 25 Mb/s
< 5ns
5 Vp-p ± 1 V into 110
load
0 V ± 0.05 V
5 ns – 30 ns
< 170 ns
Table 102: PT-AECT-OB Specifications
Item
Number of outputs
Output type
Output connector
Impedance
Signal type
Return loss
Jitter
Output amplitude
DC offset
Rise/Fall times
Propagation delay
Specification
16
Unbalanced
75
BNC per IEC 169-8 (via adaptor)
75
AES3id, SMPTE 276M
AES frame rates from 32 kHz to 192 kHz
Other 40% – 60% duty cycle digital signals from 2 Mb/s to 25 Mb/s
> 35 dB, 0.1 MHz to 6 MHz
> 25 dB, 6 MHz to 12 MHz
< 5 ns
1.0 Vp-p ± 10% into 75
load
0 V ± 0.05 V
30 ns – 44 ns
< 170 ns
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 223
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Power Consumption
Table 103: PT-AECT-OB/PT-AEBT-OB Power Consumption
Power Consumption 6.5W
AES Balanced/Coaxial Modules with TDM Capability
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 224
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Analog Composite Video Modules
Analog Composite Video Modules
Analog Video to SDI Decoder Input Modules
(PT-DEC-IB)
Operation
Figure 100: PT-DEC-IB Module
The PT-DEC-IB analog video to SDI decoder input module converts a block of eight composite NTSC or
PAL video signals to high quality, 10-bit serial digital signals (SDI) for routing within the Platinum platform. This module also may be used for "analog to analog" video routing with the optional PM-ENC-
OB or PT-ENC-OB encoder output module.
Hardware Reporting
Each of the eight channels will provide standard reporting of signal presence using a card-edge mounted
LED in each channel for on-site troubleshooting and via the frame control system. These additional system LEDs are available:
Power supply indicator
Control system acknowledgment
Input usage warning
Composite Analog Input Processing
The PT-DEC-IB accepts eight 1 Vpp analog NTSC or PAL video signals terminating into 75
BNC connectors. Using the built-in automatic (AGC) or manual gain settings, the input signal level can be adjusted ±6 dB in each channel to compensate for variances in upstream equipment. As well, each input
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 225
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Analog Composite Video Modules is "back-porch" clamped to the proper blanking level prior to conversion in the analog to digital converter (ADC) and offers the ability to handle signals with a luminance pedestal (+7.5 IRE Setup).
Composite Analog to Digital Conversion
Once the analog clamping and level processing has taken place, each channel of video is presented to a
10-bit analog to digital converter, which is phase and frequency locked by an internal PLL. Considering that the desired conversion is to component digital on this card, the analog to digital converters are 2X oversampling at 27MHz (4:2:2 data rate of 13.5MHz times 2). As a benefit of the 2X oversampling, a halfband decimation filter is applied right after the digital conversion to reduce the data rate to 1X the pixel rate, which effectively adds up to 3dB to the overall signal to noise ratio (SNR). Although sampled at a component data rate, the digitized composite signal is band pass filtered into separate luminance and chrominance channels (Y/C). The chrominance channel is sent through a quadrature demodulator for further separation into the base component color difference channels (R - Y / B - Y). As the color demodulation process is likely to cause artifacts in the video, the R - Y and B - Y signals are sent through low-pass filters to reduce those artifacts and achieve optimum bandwidth, and through a five-line adaptive comb filter to compare possible color phase shift issues from line to line. As the next step in the color demodulation process, a color space converter is used to convert the red and blue color components to U and V color difference components (Cr/Cb) as needed for ITU-R 601i and SMPTE-125M type signals.
The RGB to YUV color space conversion is defined in the following system of equations:
Y = 0.299R + 0.587G + 0.114B
U = -0.172R - 0.339G + 0.511B + 512
V = 0.511R - 0.428G - 0.083B + 512
In cases where the U/V bandwidth needs to be limited, as to prevent aliasing or chrominance crosstalk, a set of user-adjustable notch filters is provided. Although more of an issue in the companion encoder / digital to analog (DAC) cards, careful attention has to be paid to the implementation of these filters as a trade-off between frequency response and out of band noise is often encountered. In the interest of keeping the luminance or Y signal bandwidth, a peaking filter is available to the user. There are also controls for the user to set the brightness, contrast, sharpness, color saturation, and hue of the incoming video signal. Once the chrominance signals have been processed, they are reunited with the luminance (Y) channel to complete the 10-bit YUV component digital signal.
Component Digital Packaging
The parallel 10-bit component output of the ADC conversion is presented to the next process, where it is packaged with the digitized sync information and given the proper start of active video (SAV) and end of active video (EAV) headers for a SMPTE-125M compliant parallel output signal. Along with the parallel
10-bit video signal, a 27 MHz clock signal is provided for latching the data words in the downstream serializer device.
Parallel to Serial Converter
The parallel 10-bit video and clock signal are presented to the FPGA-based serializer for conversion to
SMPTE-259C serial digital component video at 270 Mb/s. The 10-bit parallel word is latched into the
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 226
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Analog Composite Video Modules serializer on the rising edge of the accompanying 27 MHz clock signal and serialized at 10 times the data rate (270 MB/s). As the serial data is used to clock downstream devices, the serial signal is scrambled and encoded using a non-return to zero (NRZI) algorithm to ensure that clock transitions occur during long periods of all 1s or 0s to keep the receiving PLLs locked.
The NRZI / scramble polynomial is defined as
G1 (X) = X9 + X4 + 1 and G2 (X) = X + 1
The completed NRZI serial signal is buffered into two copies of itself for distribution to the crosspoint module(s) within the frame.
Back Panel I/O Module for PM-DEC-IB/PT-DEC-IB
The PT-V-BP back panel I/O module corresponds to the PT-DEC-IB module.
Installation
Input Module Installation
All input modules are installed at our manufacturing facility. If you need to purchase additional components, please contact your dealer or our Sales Department.
Back Panel I/O Module Installation
All back panel modules are installed at our manufacturing facility. If you need to purchase additional components, please contact your dealer or our Sales Department.
Control
This Module’s parameters can be enabled and/or changed via CCS Navigator or the IP3 Controller.
Controllable Parameters
PT-DEC-IB User-Controllable Parameters List
Parameter
Module Parameter Hysteresis
Description
In
Sync Select
Signal Presence (1-8) [RO]
(Table Parameter)
Options
Sets hysteresis for parameters needing it
Selects which physical sync port the module uses as a reference
Reports presence or absence of valid input signal
0 to 5 seconds in 500 ns steps
(1 s)
Sync 1
Sync 2
Sync 3
Sync 4
Signal absent
Signal present
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 227
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Parameter
Video Standard (1-8)
(Table Parameter)
Pedestal Enable (1-8)
(Table Parameter)
Luminance Filter Type (1-8)
(Table Parameter)
Brightness (1-8)
(Table Parameter)
Contrast (1-8)
(Table Parameter)
Chrominance Saturation (1-8)
(Table Parameter)
Chrominance Hue (tint) (1-8)
(Table Parameter)
Chrominance Adaptive Comb
Filter (1-8)
(Table Parameter)
Wideband Chrominance
Lowpass Filter (1-8)
Chrominance Notch Filter
Select (1-8)
(Table Parameter)
Bypass (1-8)
(Table Parameter)
Analog Composite Video Modules
Description
Sets video standard
Options
Auto
NTSC
PAL B
PAL M
Combination PAL N
NTSC 4.43
SECAM
PAL 60
Enabled
Disabled
When Enabled, removes 7.5
IRE video setup level; when
Disabled, leaves the incoming signal level as is
Enables or disables luminance adaptive comb filter type
Sets brightness level
Luminance adaptive comb
filter enabled
Trap filter enabled
Both filters disabled
0 - 255 (128)
Sets contrast level 0 - 255 (128)
Sets chrominance saturation level
0 - 255 (128)
Sets chrominance hue level –180° to +180° (0°)
Enables chrominance adaptive comb filter
Enabled
Disabled
Color lowpass filter selection
Enabled
Disabled
Color notch filter selection
Bypasses Platinum auto crosspoint mute if signal is not present
Disabled
Notch 1
Notch 2
Notch 3
No
Yes
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 228
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Analog Composite Video Modules
Figure 101: PT-DEC-IB Parameters
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 229
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Functional Block Diagram
Local
I2C
Analog Composite Video Modules
Bidirectional frame control signals
Local
I2C
ENET
PIPE
Control
Logic
Card health and signal presence LEDs
Power from frame
Power failure monitoring
+24VA
+24VB
On-board supply
+5 V
-5 V
+3.3 V
+2.5 V
+1.8 V
+1.5 V
Figure 102: PT-DEC-IB Functional Block Diagram
Specifications
Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice.
Table 104: PT-DEC-IB Specifications
Item
Number of inputs
Input connector
Specification
8
75
BNC per IEC 169-8
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 230
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Item
Impedance
Signal type
Input coupling
Maximum input amplitude
Nominal input amplitude
Return loss
Clamping
Quantization
Filter
Output data rate
Frequency response
Differential gain
Differential phase
Signal to noise ratio
Bulk delay
Analog Composite Video Modules
Specification
75
NTSC, PAL
DC coupled
2.0 Vpp
1.0 Vp-p + 10%
Better than 40 dB, DC to 5.75 MHz
Automatic
10 bits
Five line adaptive comb, notch, or trap
270 Mb/s per SMPTE 259C
± 0.1 dB to 5.75 MHz
< 1%
< 1°
> 65 dB
< 80
s typically
Power Consumption
Table 105: PT-DEC-IB Power Consumption
Power Consumption 13W
SD to Analog Video Encoder Modules (PT-ENC-
OB)
Operation
Figure 103: PT-ENC-OB Module
The PT-ENC-OB is a SD-to-analog video encoder output module that converts a block of eight serial SD digital signals to composite NTSC or PAL video signals.
The PT-ENC-OB module accepts 32 serial digital (SD) video signals from the crosspoint module, which are presented to four FPGA-based deserializer chips. Within each of the deserializer chips are two 4×1 multiplexers that switch the signals to the receiver blocks.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 231
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Analog Composite Video Modules
The two receiver blocks within each of the deserializer chips perform the functions of extracting and locking all conversion functions to the bit-serial clock. To do this they:
Use the internal and external PLL circuitry to descramble the SMPTE non-return to zero (NRZI) SDI stream
Find the "x3FF" start of active video/end of active video (EAV / SAV) frame boundaries
Load the decoded data stream into a "serial in/parallel out" (SIPO) shift register for exporting the data in 10-bit parallel form
The 10-bit parallel data is loaded into the encoder chip on the rising edge of a 27 MHz pipeline clock, where it is processed for digital noise reduction (DNR) to reduce low-amplitude, high-frequency noise.
Gamma correction, sub-alias filtering (SAF), and user-based color adjustments are performed in the
"parallel CCIR-601" domain. The signal is then separated into its chrominance and luminance components, sent through the low-pass filters (LPF) to reduce aliasing effects incurred as a process of encoding the signal, and resampled at 2X to further reduce aliasing. The oversampled parallel signal is finally converted to analog composite video within the 10-bit DAC stage, sent through a 4-pole low pass filter, and buffered for presentation to the output BNC connector.
Through the control system, you can control the low-pass and notch filter selection, NTSC or PAL video standard, video pedestal, internal test signal generator, chrominance level and hue (NTSC only), brightness, sharpness, and digital noise reduction.
You must be careful when implementing the notch and low pass filters, as a "tradeoff" between frequency response and out of band noise often takes place.
Each of the eight channels provide standard reporting of signal presence via card-edge mounted LEDs
(Output 1 – Output 8) and via the control system. Additional system LEDs indicate the following:
The power supply indicator (POWER) shows that +24V is present on the module.
The control system acknowledgment indicator (ACT CTRL) shows that the control system is communicating with the module.
The Output Active warning indicator (ACT OUT) indicates that a valid input signal has been switched to an output on this module.
Back Panel I/O Module for PT-ENC-OB
The PT-V-BP back panel I/O module corresponds to the module.
Output Monitoring Module
The optional PT-HSRAEC-OM module provides output monitoring for the PT-ENC-OB.
Installation
Output Module Installation
All output modules are installed at our manufacturing facility. If you need to purchase additional components, please contact your dealer or our Sales Department.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 232
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Back Panel I/O Module Installation
Analog Composite Video Modules
All back panel modules are installed at our manufacturing facility. If you need to purchase additional components, please contact your dealer or our Sales Department.
Output Monitoring Module Installation
All output monitoring modules are installed at our manufacturing facility. If you need to purchase additional components, please contact your dealer or our Sales Department.
Control
This Module’s parameters can be enabled and/or changed via CCS Navigator or the IP3 Controller.
Controllable Parameters
Table 106: PT-ENC-OB User-Controllable Parameters List
Parameter
Module Board Level Hysteresis
Description
Out
Sync Type
Video Standard (1-8)
(Table Parameter)
Chrominance Filter Type (1-8)
(Table Parameter)
Luminance Filter Type (1-8)
(Table Parameter)
Options
Sets hysteresis for parameters needing it.
0 to 5 seconds in 500 ns steps
Selects which physical sync port the module uses as a reference
Sets video standard
Sync1
Sync2
Sync3
Sync4
NTSC
PAL-B/D/G/H/I
PAL-N
Sets chrominance filter type
1.3 MHz
0.65 MHz
1 MHz
2 MHz
Reserved
CIF
QCIF
3 MHz
Enables or disables luminance filter type
NTSC low pass
PAL low pass
NTSC notch
PAL notch
Extended
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 233
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Parameter
Analog Composite Video Modules
Description
Pedestal Enable (1-8)
(Table Parameter)
DNR (1-8)
(Table Parameter)
Brightness (1-8)
(Table Parameter)
Contrast (1-8)
(Table Parameter)
Chrominance Saturation (1-8)
(Table Parameter)
Lock Detect (1-8)
(Table Parameter)
Mute (1-8)
(Table Parameter)
Enables 7.5 IRE video setup level
Enables or disables digital noise reduction
Sets brightness level
Sets contrast level
Sets chrominance saturation level
Reports presence or absence of valid signal
Options
CIF
QCIF
Reserved
Enable
Disable
Enable
Disable
–7° to 22°
0-192
0-1255
Signal absent
Signal present
On
Off
Figure 104: PT-ENC-OB Parameters
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 234
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Functional Block Diagram
Analog Composite Video Modules
Figure 105: PT-ENC-OB Functional Block Diagram
Specifications
Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 235
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Table 107: PT-ENC-OB Specifications
Item
Number of outputs
Output connector
Impedance
Signal type
Specification
8
75
75
BNC per IEC 169-8
NTSC, PAL
Output amplitude
Return loss
Filtering
Resolution
1.0Vp-p ± 10%
> 40 dB, DC to 5.75 MHz
CCIR-601 compliant
10 bits
Frequency response
Differential gain
Differential phase
Bulk delay
Signal to noise ratio (RMS)
DC offset
± 0.05 dB to 5.2 MHz
< 0.8%
< 0.6
< 80
s
> 65 dB unified - weighting
0 V ± 0.025 V
Analog Composite Video Modules
Power Consumption
Table 108: PT-ENC-OB Power Consumption
Power Consumption 10W
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 236
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Output Monitoring Modules
Output Monitoring Modules
PX-HSRAEC-OM Output Monitoring Module
The PX-HSRAEC-OM is a 3G-SDI/HD-SDI/SD-SDI output monitoring module for the IP3 Frame. The module is designed to provide an output interface to monitor an output stream or preview an input stream as selected by the control system.
The PX-HSRAEC-OM is a dual slot card and it occupies slots 6 and 7 at the rear of the IP3 Frame.
MON
IN 1
PWR CTRL
IN 1
OUT 4
OUT 1
PX-HSRAEC-OM Output Monitoring Module
VIDEO
IN 2 OUT 2
IN 1 OUT 1
AUDIO
IN 2
FAIL
IN 2
SAFE
IN 4 FAIL
SAFE
IN 4
AUDIO
OUT 3 IN 3 OUT 4 IN 4
VIDEO
OUT 3
OUT 2
IN 3
CTRL PWR
IN 3
For Video, there are 8 HD-BNC connectors at the outside edge of the module, 4 inputs and 4 outputs
Table 109: Video Connectors
Inputs Outputs
IN 1 OUT 1
IN 2
IN 3
IN 4
OUT 2
OUT 3
OUT 4
Note: The Audio connectors though present are not currently used or functional.
The module can be used in three different ways:
The PX-HSRAEC-OM can receive a copy of the signal being sent to a particular router output
The PX-HSRAEC-OM can monitor any of the router inputs in the frame
The PX-HSRAEC-OM can also be used in an "external routing mode" where a physical cable is connected from the PX-HSRAEC-OM input port to an external source (destination or other test equipment).
Notes
PX-HSRAEC-OM modules have 2 monitor ports per slot
Slot 6 has video OUT1, OUT2
Slot 7 has Video OUT3, OUT4.
Each PX-HSRAEC-OM module can only monitor one output at a time from an output card on the same router
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 237
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
PX-HSRAEC-OM Configuration
Output Monitoring Modules
The PX-HSRAEC-OM is configured via the IP3 Database Editor in the Magellan CCS Navigator UI.
The following is an example that describes how to:
1. Configure Output Monitoring Destinations
See Add PX-HSRAEC-OM Destinations (on page 238)
2. Add Output Monitoring External Sources/Inputs
See Add PX-HSRAEC-OM External Sources/Inputs (on page 239)
3. Add Router Destinations for monitoring
See Add Monitoring Router Destinations (on page 240)
The following steps walk you through the configuration and definition of output ports from both of these output modules for monitoring.
Launch the IP3 Database Editor
1. Open Magellan CCS Navigator
2. Go to your routing system and open the IP3 Database Editor
Add PX-HSRAEC-OM Destinations
1. Go to the Destinations tab, click the Add button
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 238
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Output Monitoring Modules
Enter 4 as number of Destinations to create
(Recommended) Change the name in the Name Prefix field to visually distinguish this from other (non-monitoring) destinations. For example, include MON OUT in the name prefix.
Select a Video Device Type and select the appropriate Frame
Select Slot as Slot 6, Port as Port 1
Note: This is to map the OUT 1 port
Set Location Type to MON (Settings for Slot, Port, Channel, Max No of Ports per module, and
Max No of Channels per port fields will be set accordingly by default)
Click Add Rows
You will see 4 monitoring destinations added at Slot 6 and 7 (ports 1 and 2).
Add PX-HSRAEC-OM External Sources/Inputs
Go to the Sources tab. Click Add to add the External Output Monitoring Sources/Inputs.
1. Add 4 sources in total, 2 at Slot 6, and 2 at Slot 7.
Add 4 as the Number of Sources to create
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 239
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Output Monitoring Modules
Change the name in the Name Prefix field to distinguish as a monitoring output; for example, include MON IN
Select a Video Device Type and select the appropriate Frame
Set Location Type to EXT (Settings for Slot, Port, Channel, Max No of Ports per module, and
Max No of Channels per port fields will be set accordingly by default)
Click Add Rows
Add Monitoring Router Destinations
In the Sources tab, click the Add button
Enter 16 as number of Sources to create
(Recommended) Change the name in the Name Prefix field to visually distinguish this from other sources. For example, include OM in the name prefix.
Select a Video Device Type and select the appropriate Frame
Set Location Type to OUT
Select Slot as Slot 1, Port as Port 1
Note: This is to map the Slot 1 (OUT 1-8 ports) and Slot 2 (OUT 1-8 ports).
Click Add Rows
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 240
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Output Monitoring Modules
You will see 8 destinations for monitoring added at slot 1 and slot 2 (ports 1-8) respectively.
Save and Validate Database Matrix
1. Click Save to save the database matrix.
2. Click Validate to validate it; there should be no errors.
3. Click the X at the top to close.
4. Open the DBEditor window under Control Views
5. Click Publish to send the Database configuration to the IP3 Controller. Click Start Transfer.
Route Outputs
1. Launch and log in to the Router Soft Panel by going to http://<IPAddress>/panel
2. To monitor a router Destination:
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 241
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Output Monitoring Modules
Route any of the Destinations (created in Add Monitoring Router Destinations (on page 240 ))
from the source list to one of the monitoring outputs (created in Add PX-HSRAEC-OM
You can monitor Router Sources/Inputs in the same way.
3. To view any of the external PX-HSRAEC-OM inputs:
Route the MON Input created in Add PX-HSRAEC-OM External Sources/Inputs (on page 239 ) to
the corresponding monitoring Output created in Add PX-HSRAEC-OM Destinations (on page
NOTE: You can only monitor 1 channel from any given Output module. If you choose to monitor another channel from a given Output module, it will only be allowed if that channel is routed to monitoring port
OUT 1. And in doing so, you will disconnect any routes from another channel on that given Output card/slot/module to the other monitoring ports OUT 2 - OUT 4.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 242
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Specifications
Output Monitoring Modules
Video Specifications
Table 110: PX-HSRAEC-OM Video Specifications
Items
Number of External Inputs
Number of Outputs
Coaxial Connector
Impedance
Signal Type
Specification
4
4
HD-BNC
75 ohms
Nominal internal input amplitude
External input amplitude
Max. input cable length (1694A)
Reclocking
Return Loss
Output Jitter
Output Amplitude
DC offset
Rise/Fall times
Overshoot
SMPTE 424M, SMPTE 292M, SMPTE 259M,
SMPTE 344M, DVB-ASI, 3Mb/s to 3Gb/s
800mVp-p +/- 10%
800mVp-p +/- 10%
Up to 150m for 3Gbps
Up to 200m for 1.5Gbps
Up to 400m for 270Mbps
Automatic for data rates defined by SMPTE
424/259/292/344, DVB-ASI.
Bypass for all nonstandard rates
15dB up to 1.5GHz
10dB from 1.5GHz to 3GHz
< .2UI @ frequency tested
800mVp-p ± 10%
0V ± 0.5V
400ps – 1500ps for 270Mbps
< 270pS for 1.5Gbps
< 135pS for 3Gbps
< 10% of amplitude
Table 111: PX-HSRAEC-OM LED Indicators
LED Indicator Function
EXT IN 1
EXT IN 2
Signal Presence
Signal Presence
EXT IN 3
EXT IN 4
Signal Presence
Signal Presence
Description
Active signal on this input (green)
Active signal on this input (green)
Active signal on this input (green)
Active signal on this input (green)
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 243
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
LED Indicator Function
POWER
CTRL
Output Monitoring Modules
Description
Power Supply Indicator +24V power rails are operational
Active Control
Initializes red
Turns green when the FPGA has configured and the control system is communicating with the card
Flashes amber if there is an alarm condition on this card
Controllable Parameters
The PX-HSRAEC-OM module can be controlled via the Controller and is displayed in the Control Cards category. When you access a module (by clicking on it in the list of modules), its parameters are displayed. The total number of modules (of that type) in the frame is also displayed on the left.
Parameters
General
Name
Module Status
Module Power Good
Description Type Options
Displays current status of the module
RO
Module Ready
Firmware Upgrade
Required
Module Power
Failure
Module Over
Temperature
Informs the user if board is experiencing any power issues
RO
Yes
No
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 244
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
SDI In
Audio
Output Monitoring Modules
Name
Sync Select
Signal Presence
(Table Parameter)
AES Input Present
(Table Parameter)
TDM RX Input Present
(Table Parameter)
TDM RX CRC Error Clear
(Table Parameter)
Audio Reference
DARS Input Present
Description Type Options
Selects which physical sync port the module uses as a reference
(Note: Actual signals are not synchronized to the reference. This parameter only affects switch timing)
RW
Sync 1
Sync 2
Sync 3
Sync 4
Indicates presence of
SDI or ASI signal. ASI signals will automatically bypass all processing stages.
RO
Yes
No
Selects AES reference input for source
Yes
No
Yes
No
RW
No
Yes
RW
Sync 1
Sync 2
Sync 3
Sync 4
Yes
No
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 245
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual 1500 Watt Power Supply and External Power Supply Frame
1500 Watt Power Supply and
External Power Supply Frame
Power Supplies Overview
See Power Supplies (PX-PS) (on page 250 ) for information on the R-1500 Power Supplies that come
with the PX-FR-28 frame.
See External Power Supply Frame (PX-FR-EXPS) (on page 251) for information on the optional Power
Supply Frames.
See External Power Supply Frame (PX-FR-EXPS) (on page 251) on information on Power Distribution
Modules that interface between the R-1500 power supplies and the PX-FR-EXPS
See Installing Power Supplies (on page 256) for Power Supply Installation information.
Power Distribution Zones
The Platinum IP3 frame (PX-FR-28) is divided into four 24V Power Zones and two 5V Power Zones, to manage power distribution and loading within the frame.
For low power modules such as the PX-HSR9C-IBG or PX-HSR16C-OBG, 2N redundancy can be achieved with a second PX-PS plugged into a Power Zone. For high power modules such as the HV-SXP-16x3 or PT-
FSDMX-IBG, redundancy may require the External Power Supply Frame (PX-FR-EXPS) depending upon the number of modules plugged into that Power Zone.
Each PX-PS has a 24V and 5V output power rail. When a PX-PS is plugged into the IP3 frame or External
Power Supply Frame, its 24V output will connect to one of the four 24V power zones and its 5V output one of the two 5V power zones.
The following table lists the core modules that can be plugged into the frame and which 24V Power
Zone they are connected to.
Table 112: Power Distribution Zones
FRONT LOADING REAR LOADING
Module Component
Primary Video Crosspoint
Data Switch Card
ATDM Crosspoint Card
Redundant Video
Crosspoint Card
Power from Zone
Zone 1 and 2
Zone 1 or 2
Zone 1
Zone 3 and 4
Module Component
Power from Zone
Zone 1 or 2 Alarm Expansion Card
Redundant ATDM Crosspoint Zone 2
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 246
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
FRONT LOADING
1500 Watt Power Supply and External Power Supply Frame
REAR LOADING
Module Component Power from Zone Module Component
Redundant Data Switch
Card
Top Front Fan Module
Zone 3 or 4
Zone 1 or 2
Bottom Front Fan Module Zone 3 or 4
Resource Module Zone 1 or 2
Redundant Resource
Module
Sync Module (Left)
Sync Module (Right)
Zone 1 or 2
Zone 1
Zone 2
Output Monitoring Card
Top 4 Rears Fans
Bottom 3 Rears Fans
Power from Zone
Zone 1 or 2
Zone 1 or 2
Zone 3 or 4
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 247
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Power Zones
1500 Watt Power Supply and External Power Supply Frame
Power distribution is split into four separate zones.
Figure 106: Power Zones
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 248
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual 1500 Watt Power Supply and External Power Supply Frame
Figure 107: Power Zones
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 249
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual 1500 Watt Power Supply and External Power Supply Frame
Power Supplies (PX-PS)
The IP3 Frame (PX-FR-28) comes with 4 Power Supplies (PX-PS) - 2 at the top of the frame (at each corner) and 2 at the bottom of the frame (at each corner). The PX-PS Power Supply provides up to
1500W of power.
You can optionally install 4 additional power supplies (2 at the top of the frame, and 2 at the bottom of the frame) for a total of 8 Power Supplies in the Frame.
Power Supply Modes
The Power Switch on the front of the power supply puts the power supply into Standby mode or ON mode.
In Standby mode, the power supply is energized internally but not driving power into the frame.
In ON mode, the power supply is supplying power to frame.
Once an AC power cord is attached to a power supply, its becomes energized (partially operational internally).
Power Supply LEDs
There are four LEDs on the front of the power supply: 5V, 24V, AC, and FAN, which are used to indicate failure on the DC and AC power rails or Fan failure.
Note: The R-1500 Power Supplies are hot-pluggable.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 250
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual 1500 Watt Power Supply and External Power Supply Frame
Figure 108: R-1500 Power Supplies at the top of the IP3 Frame
Figure 109: R-1500 Power Supplies at the bottom of the IP3 Frame
Figure 110: R-1500 Power Supply
External Power Supply Frame (PX-FR-EXPS)
A separate External Power Supply Frame (PX-FR-EXPS) is available to provide additional power. The external power supply frame contains the following:
PX-PD-TOP power distribution board
4 adapter boards
Note: The PX-FR-EXPS does not come with any Power Supplies. These have to be purchased and
installed separately. See Installing Power Supplies (on page 256).
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 251
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual 1500 Watt Power Supply and External Power Supply Frame
The PX-FR-EXPS External Power Supply Frame is connected to the PX-FR-28 IP3 frame using four DC power cables: 165-100036Q00 (24") or 165-100037Q00 (90"). You can have up to 2 External Power
Supply frames connected to one IP3 frame, and these need to be installed either both above the IP3
Frame, or one above and below the Frame - this is dependent on the length of the cables (24" or 90") used to connect the PX-FR-EXPS to the PX-FR-28. See External Power Supply Frame (PX-FR-EXPS) (on
To simplify field upgrade and the manufacturability of the power section, the External Power Supply connectors are located directly on the rear of the frame (with a plastic cover when not in use). To accomplish this, a separate module is used to interconnect the MI (power distribution section) to the rear metalwork with a card edge on one side and a right angle connector on the other (with retention to the metalwork).
Required Equipment
Note: In order to minimize the risk of damage to components, the IP3 frame must be powered down during PX-FR-EXPS installation. This unit contains Electro Static Discharge Sensitive (ESDS) devices, recognized handling precautions should be observed.
One Platinum IP3 Frame (PX-FR-28)
Two PX-FR-EXPS
One Flash light
Screw Drivers and other hand tools
Power Cables
The PX-FR-28 IP3 frame does not need to be specifically configured for the PX-FR-EXPS external power supplies. 24" or 90" DC power cables must be connected between the PX-FR-28 and PX-FR-EXPS frames.
AC Power Cords also need to be connected between the IP3 Frame and the External Power Supply
Frame.
24" Male to Male Combination D-Sub (165-100036Q00)
Standard length cable that connects the PX-FR-28 Frame to the PX-FR-EXPS.
Note: Four 24"cables are included when you buy the PX-FR-EXPS frame.
24" cables are recommended to minimize power loss in the system.
If 24" cables are used to connect the PX-FR-EXPS to the PX-FR-28, one PX-FR-EXPS unit must be installed
above and one below the PX-FR-28.
90" Male to Male Combination D-Sub (165-100037Q00)
90" cables are a customer orderable option.
If 90" cables are used to connect the PX-FR-EXPS to the PX-FR-28 frame, both PX-FR-EXPS units can be installed above or below the PX-FR-28.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 252
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual 1500 Watt Power Supply and External Power Supply Frame
Power Cable Installation Steps
CAUTION All AC power lines should be disconnected before attaching the Interface (DC power) cables to the rear of the frames.
Note the orientation of the Combination D-Sub (green) connectors (with gold contacts) on the Rear panel (see Figure ). One is rotated 180 degrees from the other. Keep this in mind when attaching the
Interface (DC power) cables.
Figure 111: Rear View of the PX-FR-28 frame showing the D-Sub connectors
1. 1Mount the PX-FR-EXPS above the PX-FR-28 frame.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 253
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual 1500 Watt Power Supply and External Power Supply Frame
2. Connect all four connectors (A,B,C,D) on the PX-FR-EXPS to the corresponding connectors (A,B,C,D) on the PX-FR-28.
Figure 112: PX-FR-EXPS unit mounted above PX-FR-28
3. Attach the Interface (DC power) cables between the PX-FR-28 and PX-FR-EXPS.
Figure 113: DC Power Cables connected between PX-FR-28 and PX-FR-EXPS
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 254
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual 1500 Watt Power Supply and External Power Supply Frame
4. Secure the DC power cables to the mating Combination D-Sub connector by tightening the screws
Figure 114: Locking Screws to secure DC Power Cables connected to PX-FR-28
The following figure shows the 90" DC power cables attached to the bottom of the PX-FR-28 frame.
Figure 115: Bottom of PX-FR-28 with 90" DC Cables attached
5. Mount the second PX-FR-EXPS below the PX-FR-28 frame.
6. Repeat the above steps to connect the A,B,C,D connectors on the bottom PX-FR-EXPS to the corresponding connectors on the frame bottom.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 255
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual 1500 Watt Power Supply and External Power Supply Frame
Installing Power Supplies
CAUTION: The latch on the Power Supply (PX-PS) must be in the unlocked position (latch on the right side of the slot) before it is slid into the frame. This prevents damage to the frame and latch.
Figure 116: Power Supply with Latch in Unlocked Position
Power Supplies in PX-FR-28
The PX-FR-28 IP3 Frame comes with 4 Power Supplies (at the four corners of the frame). You can install an additional 4 Power Supplies in this Frame (2 on top and 2 at the bottom). See Installation Instructions
Power Supplies in PX-FR-EXPS
The PX-FR-EXPS External Power Supply Frame does not come with any Power Supplies. You need to purchase power supplies separately and then install them in this Frame. See Installation Instructions (on
Installation Instructions
To install a Power Supply:
1. Align a Power Supply (PX-PS) with the slot on the Frame.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 256
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual 1500 Watt Power Supply and External Power Supply Frame
2. Gently slide the Power Supply (PX-PS) into place; it should snap into the Frame.
Figure 117: Power Supply being inserted into Frame
3. After the Power Supply (PX-PS) is fully inserted into the frame:
Loosen the thumbscrew on the latch of the Power Supply (turn counter-clockwise)
Push the latch on the Power Supply all the way to the left to lock the Power Supply into place
Tighten the thumbscrew (turn clockwise) to lock the latch in place.
Figure 118: Power Supply with Latch in Locked Position
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 257
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual 1500 Watt Power Supply and External Power Supply Frame
Power Supply Specs, LEDs, and Pinouts
Power Supply Mechanical Specification
Table 113: Power Supply Mechanical Specifications
Item Specification
Dimensions 4.5 Inches by 2.6 Inches by 10.25 Inches
Cooling
Mounting
Forced Air Cooled, Front to Back Airflow, Variable Fan Speed
Control
Slides into existing cavity in the Platinum IP3 and External
Power Supply frames. Mechanically locks in place.
Field Swappable Fan Replaceable Cooling Fan Assembly. Power supply incapable of powering up with cooling fan assembly removed.
Temperature Maintains full power at temperatures from 0 to 50 degrees
Celsius
Humidity 0 to 95% Humidity, Non-Condensing
Power Supply Electrical Specification
Table 114: Power Supply Electrical Specifications
Item Specification
Input Voltage Universal AC Input (90VAC to 265VAC)
Input Frequency 47 - 63Hz
Power Factor
Correction
>96% Efficient, Active, Meets EN61000-3-2 as a Class A Device when under 50% Load,
Max Test Voltage 230VAC
Inrush Current Less than or equal to 50 Amps peak at 264VAC
Power Supply
Efficiency
Meets 80Plus Gold Efficiency Standard at Input Voltage of 230VAC. Greater Than 80%
Over Input Voltage Range
Output Voltages V1 = 5VDC, V2 = 24VDC
Output Currents 5VDC @ 10Amps, 24VDC
Output Fusing 24VDC Outputs (Pins 3 and 26 of Power Connector) each to be Fused to Prevent
Output Current from Exceeding 40 Amps
Output Power 1500 Watts (Continuous)
Line Regulation < +/- 0.1%
Load Regulation +/- 2.0% for 24VDC Output, +6.0/-2.0% for 5VDC Output
Output Noise 100mV P-P (20Mhz Bandwidth, Measured across 0.1uF and 10 uF capacitors connected in parallel)
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 258
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Item Specification
1500 Watt Power Supply and External Power Supply Frame
Overcurrent
Protection
Overvoltage
Protection
Non-destructively limit current to 110% rated maximum output, Square Current Limit with Automatic Recovery
Entire power supply shuts down if any output rail reaches 15% above rated voltage
Current Sharing Active, All Outputs, N+1 Hot Swappable (Diode Isolation), 20% Tolerance on Loads greater than 50%, Current Shares with Present Power Supply Model
Holdup Time
Indicators
16 milliseconds at One-Half Maximum Output Power
LEDs indicating 5VDC, 24VDC, and Fan Fail present on front cover. LEDs indicate complete failure of Voltage Rails, or Fan not operating, or deviation from specified voltages, or Fan speed not nominal
Alarms Alarm PCB to monitor both voltage rails and Cooling Fan and make four status signals available at the Main Connector for Remote Monitoring
I2C
Communications
Serial communications to provide all parameters listed in Table 2. Reference Table 1 for pin assignments. R1500 to be configured as Slave device. If CLK or DATA lines are pulled to GND or VCC power supply operation must not be affected
MTBF > 250,000 Hours @ 30 Degrees Celsius (Excludes Fan Life)
Power Supply LED Operation
Figure 119: LEDs on PX-PS
Table 115: Power Supply LED Operation
LED Behavior Condition
5V OFF No AC power supplied to the power supply
Solid AMBER or
BLUE
Solid GREEN
AC power supplied to the power supply but switch off
5VDC standby voltage is present and good
(NOTE: Only possible when AC power is supplied and power switch is on)
Flashing RED at 2 Hz Fault condition on secondary is detected
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 259
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
LED Behavior Condition
1500 Watt Power Supply and External Power Supply Frame
24V1 OFF
24V2 Solid GREEN
FAN
Power switch is off or AC power is not present
Corresponding 24VDC is present and good
Flashing RED at 2 Hz Failure condition detected on the corresponding 24VDC output. Possible causes:
Corresponding 24VDC output is shorted
Over-current on corresponding 24VDC output
Under-voltage on corresponding 24VDC output
Fuse blown on corresponding 24VDC output
OFF Power switch is off or AC power is not present
Solid GREEN The fan is operating normally
Flashing RED at 2 Hz Fan failure detected
Could also be used to indicate over temperature.
Power Connector Pinout
18
19
20
21
10
12
13
15
22
24
26
6
8
9
3
4
1
2
Table 116: Power Connector Pinout ELCON Model #298-08-01100
Pin
Rated
Current
Design Spec
Current
Nomenclature
Power Supply
Wire Color
35A
35A
18A
N/A
Line Input
Neutral
Black
White
35A
35A
31A
31A
+24A
-24A
Red
Green
10A
10A
10A
10mA
4A
10mA
I2C
+5
24 A Fail C
Orange
Red
Green
10A
10A
10A
10A
10A
10A
10A
10A
10A
10A
35A
10mA
10mA
10mA
10mA
10mA
10mA
4A
10mA
10mA
1mA
31A
24 A Fail E
5 Fail C
5 Fail E
I2C
Fan Fail C
Fan Fail E
-5
24B Fail C
24B Fail E
Chassis Sense
+24B
Purple
Blue
Brown
Green
Black
Gray
Black
Red
Orange
Violet
Orange
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential.
Signal
AC Line
AC Return
24V Supply
24V Return
CLK
5V Supply
Opto Collector
Opto Emitter
Opto Collector
Opto Emitter
DATA
Opto Collector
Opto Emitter
5V Return
Opto Collector
Opto Emitter
Power Level Detect
24V Supply
February 2015 | Page 260
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Pin
27
Rated
Current
35A
Design Spec
Current
31A
28 35A N/A
1500 Watt Power Supply and External Power Supply Frame
Nomenclature
-24B
Power Supply
Wire Color
Green
AC Safety Ground Green
Signal
24V Return
AC Ground
Figure 120: Connector Pin Numbering
Power Distribution Modules
Power Distribution Modules are the interface between PX-PS Power Supplies in the PX-FR-28 frame and the PX-FR-EXPS. Power Distribution Modules are connected to the PX-BP-28 MI backplane, eliminating the need for the separate connectors and wiring.
Top Power Distribution Module (PX-PD-TOP)
The Top Power Distribution Module (PX-PD-TOP) is used both in the PX-FR-28 IP3 frame and in the PX-
FR-EXPS External Power Supply Frame.
Figure 121: PX-PD-TOP - Power Distribution Module (shown with wires)
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 261
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
DIP Switches on the PX-PD-TOP
1500 Watt Power Supply and External Power Supply Frame
There are four DIP switches, SW1 to SW4, on the PX-PD-TOP Top Power Distribution board.
CAUTION: The DIP Switch must be in a specific position depending on whether the PX-PD-TOP is used in the IP3 frame or the PX-FR-EXPS External Power Supply Frame.
When the PX-PD-TOP is used in the PX-FR-EXPS frame, all switch positions should be set to
CLOSED/ON.
When the PX-PD-TOP is used in the IP3 frame, switch positions should be set to OPEN/OFF.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 262
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual 1500 Watt Power Supply and External Power Supply Frame
Figure 122: Dip Switches SW1 and SW2 on the PX-PD-TOP when installed in the External Power Supply frame (PX-FR-EXPS)
Figure 123: Dip Switches SW3 and SW4 on the PX-PD-TOP when installed in the External Power Supply frame (PX-FR-EXPS).
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 263
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Fuses on the PX-PD-TOP
1500 Watt Power Supply and External Power Supply Frame
Figure 124: Fuses on the PX-PD-TOP
Table 117: PX-PD-TOP Fuse Ratings
Fuse Type
Fastblow
Fuse Rating
10 Amps
Part Number
127-100013Q00
Bottom Power Distribution Module (PX-PD-BOT)
The PX-PD-BOT Bottom Power Distribution Module is used only in the IP3 frame and not in the External
Power Supply PX-FR-EXPS.
Figure 125: PX-PD-BOT - Power Distribution Module
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 264
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Fuses on the PX-PD-BOT
1500 Watt Power Supply and External Power Supply Frame
Table 118: PX-PD-BOT Fuse Ratings
Fuse Type Fuse Rating
Fastblow 10 Amps
Part Number
127-100013Q00
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 265
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual PX-FRONT-FAN and PX-REAR-FAN Modules
PX-FRONT-FAN and PX-REAR-FAN
Modules
The IP3 Video Crosspoint and Data Switch modules are cooled by two separate hot-swappable PX-
FRONT-FAN modules; one is located at the top of the frame, and one at the bottom (the two modules are mirror- images of each other and are not interchangeable). Each Front Fan module contains six individual fans. There are seven large fans that exhaust heat from the rear of the frame. The Rear Fan modules provide the main cooling for the entire frame (power supplies and modules).
Operation of the Fan Modules
Each PX-FRONT-FAN module contains six 40 mm2 fans. The temperature of the IP3 Video Crosspoint
(PX-576x1024-3G) module is communicated to the Front Fan modules; the speed of the fans is adjusted to 25%, 50%, or 75% of their full speed based upon the temperature of the Video Crosspoint module. If the Front Fan module detects a fan failure or loss of communication with the Resource module, the other five fans in the array are automatically set to 75% speed. (100% speed does not affect cooling performance.)
CAUTION: Front Fan modules are the main source of cooling for the Video Crosspoint modules. In the event of a fan failure, ensure that you replace the fan as soon as possible to prevent overheating.
The rear fans automatically switch to 75% speed if one of the fans fails, or is disconnected.
Fan failures are indicated by alarms to the IP3 Controller, and by lit LEDs beside the fans themselves.
If either of the Front Fan modules is disconnected from the IP3 frame for a period of time, the Rear Fan speeds will be increased to compensate, to keep the IP3 Video Crosspoint and Data Switch modules cool.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 266
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual PX-FRONT-FAN and PX-REAR-FAN Modules
The top and bottom Front Fan modules each have a recessed Reset button located next to the status
LEDs. When activated, this button forces the fan module into Failsafe mode. To put the Front Fan module into Failsafe mode for firmware reprogramming, insert a paper clip into the small hole, and then press and hold the button for three seconds. Then use the IP3 Controller to upgrade the firmware on the
Front Fan module.
Figure 126: Top and Bottom Front Fan Modules
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 267
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Table 119: Fan LED Indicators
LED Name LED Color Description
Power Red
Green
PX-FRONT-FAN and PX-REAR-FAN Modules
The 24 VDC power supply is missing.
The module is receiving 24 VDC and 5 VDC power.
Alarm Level
Major
None
ACT CTRL
Off
Red
Green
Off
No power is present on the Front Fan module. Major
The module has not communicated with the Resource module (PX-RES) for 5 seconds, or a power failure has occurred.
The Front Fan module is operating normally and communicating with the Resource module via the PX-ALARM module.
Major
None
The module has lost standby power and is not communicating with the resource module.
Major
The fan is operating normally. Info Fans 1 to 6 Green
Flashing Red and Green
The fan has failed or is disconnected. Major
Figure 127: Front Fan Module LEDs
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 268
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual PX-FRONT-FAN and PX-REAR-FAN Modules
Servicing the Fans
The following fan parts can be replaced in the field:
Top PX-FRONT-FAN array module
Bottom PX-FRONT-FAN array module
Individual front fan units
Individual rear fan units
Front Fan Module
To replace a Front Fan module, follow these steps:
1. After opening the front door of the frame, locate the faulty fan module.
2. Loosen the two thumbscrews, and then swing the module to the left.
Figure 128: Front Fan Module Array (Top Module Shown)
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 269
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual PX-FRONT-FAN and PX-REAR-FAN Modules
3. Disconnect the wiring harness by squeezing the white connector tabs together and gently pulling apart the connector.
Figure 129: Unlocking Wire Connector
4. Lift the module up and out of its hinge.
5. Swing open the other fan module array to ease the replacement process.
6. Insert the replacement module.
7. Reconnect the wiring harness. (Note: the connector has a key slot; see Figure .)
Figure 130: Wire Connector
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 270
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual PX-FRONT-FAN and PX-REAR-FAN Modules
8. Swing the module closed, and then tighten the two thumbscrews.
9. Close the other fan array module.
Individual Fan
To replace an individual front fan, follow these steps:
1. Open the front door of the frame and locate the faulty fan (indicated by a red LED).
2. Remove the two screws in the fan, and unplug the wire harness using tweezers or needle nose pliers.
Figure 131: Removing Individual Front Fan
3. Insert the replacement fan, screw the fan into place, and then re-connect the wire harness.
4. Verify that the fan status LED is lit green.
5. Close the front door of the frame.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 271
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Rear Fans
A failed Rear Fan module is indicated by a red LED.
PX-FRONT-FAN and PX-REAR-FAN Modules
Figure 132: Rear Fan LED
To remove and replace a Rear Fan Module, follow these steps:
1. Remove the four captive screws in the corners of the fan unit.
Figure 133: Rear Fan
2. Carefully slide the fan straight out.
3. Confirm the correct orientation of the replacement fan (the electrical connector should be in the bottom left corner), then slide the new fan into position.
4. Secure the Rear Fan module to the frame by tightening the four captive screws.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 272
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
5. Verify that the Rear Fan status LED is green.
PX-FRONT-FAN and PX-REAR-FAN Modules
CAUTION: The black shutters located behind the fans are necessary to prevent warm air from recirculating back into the frame. Ensure the shutters are not removed.
Fuses
Front and rear fans on the Platinum IP3 are protected by fuses. If a fan fuse blows, a serious electrical fault has occurred; the fuse should not be replaced until the electrical fault has been corrected. Use tweezers or needle-nose pliers to lift the fuses straight out of their sockets.
CAUTION: Fuses on the Front Fan module and Rear Fan Adapter boards should not be removed or replaced in a live (powered) Platinum IP3 frame.
Table 120: Fan Fuses
Location
Front
Rear
PSF1
PSF2
FC1
PSF1
PSF2
PSF3
Fuse Type Part Number
4 A, Slowblow
4 A, Slowblow
127-100006Q00
127-100006Q00
750 mA, Slowblow 127-100004Q00
5 A, Slowblow 127-100010Q00
5 A, Slowblow 127-100010Q00
750 mA, Slowblow 127-100004Q00
Fuses on Front Fan Modules
Front Fan fuses are visible inside the Front Fan module array. To inspect or remove fuses, first remove
them straight out of their sockets.
Figure 134: Front Fan Fuses (Top Module Shown)
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 273
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Fuses on Rear Fan Adapter Boards
PX-FRONT-FAN and PX-REAR-FAN Modules
Fuses are located under the base of the black shutter assembly found behind each rear fan.
To gain access to the rear fan fuses, carefully grasp the two tabs on the sides of the shutter assembly.
Then slide the shutter assembly towards you, tilting out the bottom, so that the assembly pivots around the small studs at the top of the opening. When replacing the shutter assembly, ensure the top of the assembly is inserted behind these studs.
CAUTION: Ensure you disconnect the two power cables shown in Figure when replacing rear fan fuses in a live (powered) IP3 frame.
Figure 135: Rear Shutter Assembly
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 274
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual PX-FRONT-FAN and PX-REAR-FAN Modules
Figure 136: Rear Fan Fuses
Power Consumption
Table 121: FANS Power Consumption
PX-FRONT-FAN-TOP PX-FRONT-FAN-BOT PX-REAR-FAN-ADPTR PX-REAR-FAN
24V Power Rail 55.2W 55.2W 0 67W
5V Power Rail 0.82W
Total per Module 56.02W
0.82W
56.02W
0.15W
0.15W
0
67W
(Note: Includes
172 mm fan)
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 275
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Module LEDs
Module LEDs
Card Edge LED Diagnostics
There are multiple card edge LEDs on IP3 Input Modules (PX-IB) (on page 80) and Output Modules (PX-
OB) (see "Input Modules (PX-IB)" on page 80) Modules.
LED Labels
LEDs are labeled as follows:
Input Modules
Output Modules
INPUT 1 to INPUT 9
OUTPUT 1 to OUTPUT 16
Under normal working conditions, all the LEDs are used to indicate signal presence status.
Under certain abnormal conditions, for instance if a module is improperly installed, or the wrong kind of module is plugged in a slot (designed to host another type of module), card edge LEDs are used to show diagnostic information.
LED States
There are three possible states indicated by each LED:
Table 122: LED States
State Description
Off
On
No signal present
Signal present and reclocker locked to signal
Flashing Signal present but reclocker could not lock to signal
Input Module LEDs (on page 277 )
Input 1 and Input 2 (on page 277 )
Input 3, Input 4, Input 5 (on page 277)
Input 6, Input 7, Input 8, Input 9 (on page 277)
Output Module LEDs (on page 278 )
Output 1 - Output 6 (on page 278 )
Output 7, Output 8, Output 9 (on page 278)
Output 13, Output 14, Output 15, Output 16 (on page 278)
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 276
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Input Module LEDs
Module LEDs
Input 1 and Input 2
INPUT 1 and INPUT 2 flash to indicate abnormal hardware status in the slot. Note that they are NOT turning on/off at the same time.
Input 3, Input 4, Input 5
These LED inputs indicate module configuration.
Table 123: LED Inputs 3, 4, 5
INPUT
3
OFF ON
ON
INPUT
4
ON
INPUT
5
Description
OFF
Front Module is SD (270Mbps) only.
Works only with specific Back Modules designed for the Platinum system
OFF
Front Module is SD/HD/3G.
Works only with specific Back Modules designed for the Platinum system
OFF OFF ON
Front Module is SD (270Mbps) only.
Works only with specific Back Modules designed for the IP3 system
ON OFF ON
Front Module is SD/HD/3G.
Works only with specific Back Modules designed for the Platinum system
Input 6, Input 7, Input 8, Input 9
These LED inputs indicate Back Module types.
Table 124: LED Inputs 6, 7, 8, 9
INPUT
6
ON
OFF
ON
INPUT 7
ON
OFF
OFF
INPUT
8
INPUT
9
Description
ON ON
No Back Module installed at the back of this slot, OR
Front Module not correctly mated with Back Module
OFF OFF
Back Module contains 9x HD-BNC connectors
OFF OFF
Back Module contains 1x DensiShield socket and 1x HD-BNC connector
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 277
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
INPUT
6
OFF
ON
INPUT 7
ON
ON
INPUT
8
INPUT
9
Description
OFF OFF
Back Module contains 5x SFP sockets
OFF OFF
Back Module contains 8x BNC connectors
Module LEDs
Output Module LEDs
Output 1 - Output 6
LEDs OUTPUT 1 to OUTPUT 6 flash to indicate abnormal hardware status in the slot. Note that they are
NOT turning on/off at the same time.
Output 7, Output 8, Output 9
LED Outputs 7, 8, 9
OUTPUT
7
OFF
OUTPUT
8
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OUTPUT
9
OFF
OFF
Description
Front Module is SD (270Mbps) only.
Works only with specific Back Modules designed for the Platinum system
Front Module is SD/HD/3G.
Works only with specific Back Modules designed for the Platinum system
ON
Front Module is SD (270Mbps) only.
Works only with specific Back Modules designed for the IP3 system
ON OFF ON
Front Module is SD/HD/3G.
Works only with specific Back Modules designed for the IP3 system
Output 13, Output 14, Output 15, Output 16
These LED outputs indicate Back Module types.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 278
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Table 125: LED Outputs 13, 15, 15, 16
Module LEDs
OUTPUT 13 OUTPUT 14 OUTPUT 15 OUTPUT 16 BM Types
ON ON ON ON
No Back Module installed at the back of this slot, OR
Front Module not correctly mated with Back
Module
OFF OFF OFF ON
Back Module contains 16x HD-BNC connectors
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
Back Module contains 8x SFP sockets
Back Module contains 2x DensiShield sockets and 8x HD-BNC connectors
Back Module contains 2x DensiShield sockets and 4x SFP sockets
Back Module contains 8x BNC connectors
Back Module contains 2x DensiShield sockets
Back Module contains 4x SFP sockets
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 279
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Module Interconnect (PX-BP-28)
Module Interconnect (PX-BP-28)
The PX-BP-28 Module Interconnect (MI) is the central interconnect module for the IP3 frame. The Input,
Output, Crosspoint, Resource, Alarm and other modules are interconnected by copper traces in the
Backplane. Also, DC power, +24V and +5VL, are distributed within the Backplane to all module's connector.
While the PX-BP-28 is a passive module with no active components on the Module Interconnect, there are fuses next to each module's connector. These fuses are to prevent damage to module connectors
and the Backplane. See Fuses on the Module Interconnect (PX-BP-28) (on page 281) for more details.
PX-BP-28 Module Slots
The following module slots are present on the PX-BP-28:
Table 126: Module Slots on the PX-BP-28
Slot Type Number of Slots
Input Module Slots 64
Output Module Slots
Video Crosspoint Module Slots
Audio TDM Crosspoint Module Slots 2
64
2
Data Switch Module Slots
Resource (Control) Module Slots
Sync Distribution Module Slots
Output Monitoring Module Slot
Alarm Expansion Module Slot
Auxiliary Module Slot
Power Distribution Slots
2
2
2
1
1
1
2
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 280
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Module Interconnect (PX-BP-28)
Fuses on the Module Interconnect (PX-BP-28)
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 281
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Figure 137: Fuses on the PX-BP-28 MI Backplane
Module Interconnect (PX-BP-28)
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 282
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Figure 138: Fuses at the top of PX-BP-28
Module Interconnect (PX-BP-28)
Figure 139: Fuses on left arm of PX-BP-28
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 283
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Figure 140: Fuses on right arm of PX-BP-28
Module Interconnect (PX-BP-28)
Figure 141: Fuses at the center of the PX-BP-28
Fuses on the PX-BP-28
Fuse Type
Slowblow
Slowblow
Fuse Rating
5 Amps
2 Amps
Fastblow 10 Amps
Present on
Resource Card Slots
Part Number
127-100010Q00
Alarm Card Slots
Output Monitoring Slots
127-100001Q00
All Other Slots 127-100013Q00
Module Interconnect Installation
The PX-BP-28 Module Interconnect is installed into the IP3 frame at the Imagine Communications manufacturing facility. This module cannot be replaced in the field.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 284
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Module Interconnect (PX-BP-28)
Fuses can be replaced in the field, however the Frame and External Power Supply frame must be powered down.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 285
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
Auxiliary Module (PX-AUX)
Auxiliary Module (PX-AUX)
The Auxiliary Module (PX-AUX) provides connectivity between MI/Backplane (PX-BP-28) and the Front
Fan modules. The PX-AUX module is plugged into a card slot, in the very center of the frame.
The PX-AUX module contains fuses and Transient Voltage Suppressor (TVS) diodes for over-current and
Transient Voltage protection respectively. Besides these components the PX-AUX is passive.
The module connects power and communication signals from the IP3 MI/backplane to the Front Fan
Modules.
It connects 24VDC, 5VDC power and a one-wire interface signal to the two Front Fan Modules.
Figure 142: PX-AUX Module
The PX-AUX has 3 connectors:
One to the MI backplane
One to the Bottom Fan
One to the Top Fan
WARNING
The PX-AUX module is hot pluggable, however, it is recommended that the frame is powered down first.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 286
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
PX-AUX Fuses
Auxiliary Module (PX-AUX)
Figure 143: Fuses on the PX-AUX Module
Table 127: PX-AUX Fuse Ratings
Fuse Name Fuse Type
F3, F1 Slowblow
Resettable
Fuse Rating
4 Amps
0.2 Amps
Part Number
127-100006Q00
127-100005Q00
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 287
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual
PX-AUX Block Diagram
MI CONECTOR
+24V_Z1
+24V_Z2
+5V_TOP
AUX1
ENET1+/-
ENET2+/-
+24V_Z3
+24V_Z4
+5V_BOTTOM
AUX2
ENET3+/-
ENET4+/-
Figure 144: PX-AUX block diagram
Auxiliary Module (PX-AUX)
TOP FAN CARD
CONNECTOR
+24VA_T
+24VB_T
+5V_T
AUX1
ENET1+/-
ENET2+/-
BOTTOM FAN CARD
CONNECTOR
+24VA_B
+24VB_B
+5V_B
AUX2
ENET3+/-
ENET4+/-
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 288
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Sync Module Interconnect (PX-SYNC-MI)
Sync Module Interconnect (PX-SYNC-MI)
The PX-AUX is a passive module with four connectors. The module provides a passive connection between the MI/Backplane (PX-BP-28), PT-SYNC cards, and Communications Backplane (PX-CBP).
The PX-SYNC-MI Sync Module:
Connects the 4 Sync/Reference input signals on the PX-CBP to both PT-SYNC slots
Connects the Sync/Reference signals from the PT-SYNC modules to the MI/Backplane (PX-BP-28)
Connects +24V and +5VL from the MI/Backplane to both PT-SYNC slots
Also, serial communication from the Resource module (PX-RES) is connected through the MI/Backplane, through the PX-SYNC-MI to the PT-SYNC slots.
Provision has also been made to support:
Genlock over Ethernet, by routing a Sync signal (RES_SYNC) from the Resource module to the PT-SYNC slots
Audio synchronization of two IP3 frame
Figure 145: PX-SYNC-MI Module
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 289
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Power Adapter Module (PX-PWR-ADPTR)
Power Adapter Module (PX-PWR-
ADPTR)
The Power Adapter Module (PX-PWR-ADPTR) connects DC power (+24V and +5VL) and control signals
(I2C and Alarm) from the External Power Supply Frame (PX-FR-EXPS) to the Power Distribution modules
(PX-PD-TOP and PX-PD-BOTTOM). Two Power Adapter boards are assembled into the AC/DC Rear Panel.
There are four AC/DC Rear Panels assembled to the IP3 frame; two at the top and two at the bottom.
The Power Adapter module contains fuses and Transient Voltage Suppressors (TVS) diodes for overcurrent and Transient Voltage protection respectively. Besides these components the Power Adapter module is passive.
Eight Power Adapter modules are installed in the frame, so that two PX-FR-EXPS frames can be connected to the IP3 frame for power redundancy.
When the IP3 frame is shipped, plastic covers are placed over the Combo D-sub miniature (Dsub) connector to protect the pins from damage. The plastic covers should only be removed if the PX-FR-EXPS is connected to the IP3 frame.
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 290
Platinum™ IP3
Installation and Operation Manual Power Adapter Module (PX-PWR-ADPTR)
WARNING
24V and 5V are exposed on D-sub connectors. Keep plastic covers on when not used for connection to
PX-FR-EXPS, to avoid accidental shorting that could disturb the IP3 system.
Figure 146: PX-PWR-ADPTR Module
WARNING
This module is not hot-pluggable. The Frame must be powered down if you need to remove this module.
Fuses on the Power Adapter PX-PWR-ADPTR
Table 128: PX-PWR-ADPTR - Fuse Ratings
Fuse Name
F1, F2
F3
Fuse Type
Fastblow
Fastblow
Fuse Rating
40 Amps
12 Amps
Part Number
127-100014Q00
127-100015Q00
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. February 2015 | Page 291
Λήψη
Δημόσιος σύνδεσμος ενημερώθηκε
Ο δημόσιος σύνδεσμος για τη συνομιλία σας ενημερώθηκε. You may view and manage your chat links after registration here.
Δημόσιος σύνδεσμος εγγράφου
Διαφήμιση
Σχετικά
